U
HTR-6180
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f)
When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
MAST
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1
IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
2
3
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Caution-ii En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
1
2
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
L
3
4
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
18 Before moving this unit, press SYSTEM OFF to set this
unit to the standby mode, and then disconnect the AC power
plug from the AC wall outlet.
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
5
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
–
–
–
other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
L
if you turn off this unit by SYSTEM OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
6
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
7
8
9
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
Caution-iii En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ............ 65
Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
preset channels .................................................... 67
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
INTRODUCTION
information .......................................................... 69
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth
component ........................................................... 72
PREPARATION
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
Selecting the desired SCENE template
Controlling this unit, a TV,
to the SCENE buttons.......................................... 37
Using the remote control
for the SCENE feature......................................... 41
Displaying the current status of this unit on a video
monitor ................................................................ 44
Playing video sources in the background
of an audio source................................................ 45
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode) .................................... 51
Using HD Radio™ features
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
(at the end of this manual)
Front panel................................................................i
Remote control ....................................................... ii
List of remote control codes ................................. iii
A
4
SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the name
“
preset channels .................................................... 62
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information .......................................................... 63
of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to
the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for
the information about each position of the parts.
1 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES
Features
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 120 W + 120 W
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio
based on HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is licensed by HDMI
Licensing, LLC.)
Center: 120 W
Surround: 120 W + 120 W
Surround back: 120 W + 120 W
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
information capability
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals
capability
SCENE function
◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ SCENE templates for customizing capability
◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support
component (some models only) working with the SCENE
function
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
◆ HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)
licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI
digital video) capability for monitor out
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or
480p/576p to 720p, 1080i or 1080p
◆ SILENT CINEMA
DOCK terminal
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such
as YBA-10, sold separately)
Digital audio decoders
◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
decoder
Other features
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ Neural Surround decoder
◆ SRS CS II decoder (U.S.A. model only)
◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-
channel input
◆ Component video input/output capability includes
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video
↔ component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability
◆ iPod controlling capability
Radio tuners
◆ FM/AM tuning capability
◆ HD Radio™ digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A.
model only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner
and Home Dock, sold separately)
◆ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using
SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately)
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility
◆ Bi-amplification connection capability
◆ Sleep timer
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
❏ Remote control
❏ Batteries (2) (AA, R6, UM-3)
❏ Optimizer microphone
❏ AM loop antenna
❏ Indoor FM antenna
2 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice
Notice
iPod™
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is
used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
A
4
• “ SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.
Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this
manual for the information about each position of the
parts.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• The symbol “☞” with page number(s) indicates the
corresponding reference page(s).
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the
most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe
level. One that lets the sound come through loud and
clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and,
most importantly, without affecting your sensitive
hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic
Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive
volume levels.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc.
Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned
by Neural Audio Corporation.
©2006 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, “SiriusConnect”,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535
& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are
incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
3 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GETTING STARTED
Getting started
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1
3
2
1
2
Take off the battery compartment cover.
Insert the two supplied batteries
(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
Notes
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
B
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light
becomes dim.
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
4 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Quick start guide
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. See pages 11 to 15 for
details of the speaker placement.
Front right
speaker
Preparation: Check the items
Prepare the following items.
Video monitor
Subwoofer
Front left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speakers ...................................x 2
❏ Center speaker ..................................x 1
❏ Surround speakers ............................x 4
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is
as follows:
Center
speaker
Surroundback
right speaker
DVD player
Surround back left
speaker
1. Two surround speakers
2. Center speaker
Surround left
speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
❏ Active subwoofer ...................................x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cables .......................................x 7
❏ Subwoofer cable ....................................x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player ..............................................x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor .........................................x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable .............................................x 2
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................x 1
y
You can also connect two subwoofers to this unit. In this
case, prepare two active subwoofers and subwoofer cables.
Enjoy DVD playback!
5 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
Front speakers and center speaker
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 jack
Loosen
Insert
Tighten
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
L
GND
R
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
DVR VCR
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
1
2
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL
SIRIUS
XM
OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
L
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
GND AM
HD Radio
ANTENNA
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
SINGLE
IN
OUT
(U.S.A. model)
Speaker terminals
1
2
Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
To the front right
speaker
To the center speaker
To the front left
speaker
Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
Surround and surround back speakers
To the surround
back left speaker
To the surround
right speaker
Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)
cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.
Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
To the surround
left speaker
To the surround
back right speaker
4
Connect the subwoofer cable to the
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack of this unit
and the input jack of the subwoofer.
3
Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
Subwoofer
AV receiver
E
VID
DOCK
1
2
3
4
PRE OUT
SINGLE
CENTER
D
S VI
D
DV
1
2
OOFER
SUBW
CK
BA
SUR.
D
UN
RRO
1
2
3
4
Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each
other.
Input jack
SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT 1 jack
Subwoofer cable
y
You can also connect another subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT 2 jack.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any
metal part of this unit.
6 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
3
Connect the video cable to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video
input jack of your video monitor.
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack
AV receiver
Video monitor
DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack
DVD VIDEO jack
VIDEO
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
L
GND
R
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
DVR VCR
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
M
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
IN
R
DV
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
OUT
PONENT VIDEBO
DTV/CBL
COM
Y
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
Y
1
2
P
B
D
DV
P
B
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
R
DIGITAL
P
SIRIUS
XM
OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
L
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
HD Radio
ANTENNA
GND AM
R
C
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
SINGLE
IN
OUT
Video input jack
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
jack
Video cable
(U.S.A. model)
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC
wall outlets.
4
Connect the power plug of this unit and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLETS for the power
1
Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
■ For further connections
•
•
•
•
Using the other kind of speaker combinations
Connecting a video monitor via various ways of the
Connecting a DVD player via various ways of the
Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video
AV receiver
M
DVD player
H
ONT (8C
FR
DIO
AU
T
OU
H
IN
SB (8C
T
OU
VCR
IN
R
DV
OUT
(REC)
D/
DTV/CBL
D
DV
D-R
D
D
6
DV
IN1
DV
CD
5
DTV/CBL
D
DV
3
4
AXIAL
R
CO
recorder
SPEAKERS
CENTER
OPTICAL
SU
AL INPUT
DIGIT
A
R
ONT B/ZONE B/
FR
NCE
L
L
ZONE 2/PRESE
EXTRA SP
R
•
•
Connecting a set-top box
Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or a
Digital coaxial
audio output
jack
turntable
DVD DIGITAL
INPUT COAXIAL
jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
•
•
Connecting an external amplifier
Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-channel
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
2
Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
•
Bluetooth adapter
•
•
Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
DVD player
AV receiver
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
•
•
•
Connecting a FM/AM antenna
OUT
IN
DEO
R
DV
DTV/CBL
V
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock
Connecting the SiriusConnect tuner
MPONENT
CO
D
DV
P
R
Y
A
P
B
P
R
Composite
video output
jack
DVD VIDEO jack
Video cable
7 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
■ About SCENE function
Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button
Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this
unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field
program according to the SCENE template that has been
assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are
built combinations of input sources and sound field
programs.
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see
y
If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the
SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the
component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of
the DVD player for further information.
1
Turn on the video monitor and then set the
input source selector of the video monitor to
this unit.
■ The default assigned SCENE templates
Default
SCENE
button
The name of the SCENE template
and its description
S
2
Press SCENE1 button.
This unit is turned on. “DVD Viewing” appears in the
front panel display, and this unit automatically
optimize own status for the DVD playback.
DVD Viewing
– input source: DVD
SCENE
1
– sound field program: Straight
For when you want to listen to a music disc from
the connected DVD player as the background
music for this room.
Disc Listening
– input source: DVD
SCENE
2
– sound field program: 7ch Stereo
For when you want to listen to a music disc from
the connected DVD player as the background
music for this room.
TV Viewing *1
– input source: DTV/CBL
SCENE
3
– sound field program: Straight
For when you want to watch a TV program.
y
Radio Listening *2, *3, *4
– input source: TUNER
– sound field program: 7ch Enhancer
For when you want to listen to a music program
from the FM radio station.
SCENE
4
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while
this unit is in the SCENE mode.
3
4
Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
Notes
J
Rotate VOLUME to adjust the volume.
*1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in
*2 You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this
pages 53 to 56 for tuning information.
*4 To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected
AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the
indoor FM antenna.
y
You can change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE
Note
When you change the input source or sound field program,
the SCENE mode is deactivated.
8 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
■ After using this unit...
What do you want to do with this
unit?
K
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to
the standby mode.
■ Customizing the SCENE templates
•
•
Using various SCENE templates
Creating your original SCENE templates
■ Using various input sources
•
•
•
•
Basic controls of this unit
Enjoying FM/AM radio programs
Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs
Enjoying SIRIUS Satellite Radio programs
•
•
Using your iPod with this unit
Using the Bluetooth components
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from
the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby
S
mode, press the desired SCENE buttons
■ Using various sound features
A
K
(or SCENE) or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
•
•
Using various sound field programs
D
Using the pure direct mode for high
fidelity sound
•
Customizing the sound field programs
■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit
•
Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters
•
Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit
•
•
Setting the remote control
Adjusting the advanced parameters
■ Additional feature
Automatically turning off this unit
•
9 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connections
Rear panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
SINGLE
CENTER
L
GND
R
S VIDEO
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
1
2
OUT
OUTPUT
OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL
SIRIUS
XM
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
L
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
GND AM
HD Radio
ANTENNA
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
SINGLE
IN
OUT
(U.S.A. model)
8
9
0
A
B
9
TRIGGER OUT jack
This is control expansion jack for custom installation.
Name
Page
1
XM jack
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
SIRIUS jack
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
21
2
AUDIO jacks
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
ZONE2 OUT jacks
PRE OUT jacks
3
4
5
6
7
DOCK terminal
17-22
Video component jacks
(VIDEO and S VIDEO)
17-22
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
ANTENNA terminals
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Speaker terminals
HDMI jacks
8
9
0
A
B
26
11-16
18
AC OUTLETS
10 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout
7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 14
for connection information.
y
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 13 for
details.
C
FL
FR
FR
SW
FL
SR
30˚
C
SL
SL
SR
SR
SL
60˚
SW
SBR
80˚
SBR
SBL
SBL
30 cm (12 in) or more
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
SW: Subwoofer
Front left and right speakers
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Surround back left and right speakers
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Subwoofer(s)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity
sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. You can connect one or
two subwoofer(s) to this unit. When you use two subwoofers, you can enjoy deeper bass sound. The position of the
subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer
near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
y
When you use two subwoofers, select the same type of the subwoofer as another and set these subwoofers as same sound characteristics.
Place each subwoofer at the same distance from the listening position. The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack is the
same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack.
11 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ 6.1-channel speaker layout
See page 14 for connection information.
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout
See page 14 for connection information.
y
y
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See
page 13 for details.
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See
page 13 for details.
FR
FR
SW
SW
FL
SR
FL
C
C
SR
SL
SW
SW
SB
SL
Speaker indications
Speaker indications
C
C
FL
FR
FL
FR
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SB: Surround back
SW: Subwoofer
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SW: Subwoofer
30˚
30˚
60˚
SL
SL
SR
SR
SL
SL
SR
SR
60˚
80˚
80˚
SB
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Surround left and right speakers
Subwoofer(s)
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).
Subwoofer(s)
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).
Surround left and right speakers
Surround back speaker
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND
speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers
behind the listening position. For the smooth and
unbroken sound field behind the listening position, place
the surround left and right speakers farther back compared
with the placement in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. The
surround back channel signals are directed to the surround
left and right speakers when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to
Connect a single surround speakers to the SURROUND
BACK SINGLE speaker terminal and place the single
surround back speaker behind the listening position. The
surround back left and right channel signals are mixed
down and output at the single surround back speaker when
you set “SUR.B L/R SP” to “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see
For other speaker combinations
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/
6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.
Use the automatic setup feature (see page 32) or set the “SPEAKER SET” parameters in “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 87) to output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.
12 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Using presence speakers
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front and surround back speakers with extra ambient effects
produced by the sound field programs (see page 48). You can adjust the vertical position of dialogues with using the
To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the EXTRA SP terminal (see page 14) and set “EXTRA SP
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
Speaker indications
FL: Front left
FR: Front right
C: Center
PL
PR
PL: Front presence left
PR: Front presence right
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
FL
FR
C
13 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
Caution
•
•
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage
this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front
panel display when you turn on this unit.
•
•
Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 28). 4 ohm
speakers can be also used as the front speakers. For details about the speaker impedance setting, see page 109.
Note
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable
to the “–” (black) terminals.
■ For the 7.1-channel speaker setting
EXTRA SP terminals
Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), front speaker systems in another room
Subwoofers
(ZONE B), presence speakers, or Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected
to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 87).
(optional)
y
You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
L
GND
R
S VIDEO
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
C
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
1
2
6
OUT
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SIRIUS
XM
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AC OUTLETS
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
GND AM
HD Radio
ANTENNA
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
SINGLE
IN
OUT
Center speaker
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
Right
Surround speakers
Surround back speakers
14 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ For the 6.1-channel speaker setting
Center speaker
EXTRA SP terminals
(optional)
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
D
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
Subwoofers
D-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
2
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
AL
UT
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
L
L
R
L
L
AM
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
5mA MAX.
SINGLE
Right
Left
Left (SINGLE)
Right
Left
Surround speakers
Surround back speaker
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
■ For the 5.1-channel speaker setting
Center speaker
EXTRA SP terminals
(optional)
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
DOCK
FRONT (8CH)
SINGLE
CENTER
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
D
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
Subwoofers
D-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
2
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
AL
UT
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
L
L
R
L
L
AM
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
5mA MAX.
SINGLE
Right
Left
Right
Left
Surround speakers
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
15 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting the speaker cable
■ Connecting the banana plug
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding
terminal.
10 mm (0.4 in)
2
Loosen the knob.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
■ Using bi-amplification connections
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers
to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high
pass filter) crossovers.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections
to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-
amplification.
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown
below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
Front speakers
Left
Right
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
FRONT
A
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
R
SINGLE L
This unit
Note
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the
shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the
instruction manuals of the speakers for details.
16 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with.
Audio jacks and cable plugs
Video jacks and cable plugs
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
L
R
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(Yellow)
(Red)
(Blue) (Green)
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
S
O
V
PR
PB
Y
L
R
C
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
AUDIO jacks
VIDEO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
Note
y
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. Optical input jacks are compatible
with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See
17 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Information on HDMI™
Video signals
■ HDMI signal compatibility
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the
following resolutions:
Audio signals
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
media
Video signal format
– 480i/60 Hz
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, Blu-
ray Disc, HD DVD,
etc.
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
DSD
2/5.1ch,
SA-CD, etc.
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks
Bitstream
Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
HDMI input jack
IN1
Assigned input source
DVD
Bitstream (High Dolby TrueHD,
definition audio) Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master
Blu-ray Disc,
HD DVD, etc.
IN2
IN3
DTV/CBL
DVR
Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
HDMI
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio
signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the
following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 25)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source
component, and set the component appropriately.
HDMI cable plug
Notes
y
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5
meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input
source component appropriately so that the component outputs
the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the
bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied
instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features
(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet)
of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the
audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
Notes
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be
output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”
18 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow
■ Video signal flow
Input
Output
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Digital output
Analog output
Through
Notes
Notes
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks can be output at
the HDMI OUT jack only when “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”
• When the video signals are input at the HDMI, COMPONENT
VIDEO, S VIDEO, and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the
input signals is as follows:
1. HDMI
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the
AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
2. COMPONENT VIDEO
3. S VIDEO
4. VIDEO
• Digital video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks cannot
be output from analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals with
480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the
S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution
are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
• Use the “HDMI RES.” parameter in “VIDEO SET” to
deinterlace and convert the resolution of the analog video
signals output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 99).
19 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the
S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
• When you use the internal tuner of the TV as the input source,
connect the digital or analog audio output jacks of the TV and
digital or analog audio input jacks of this unit. Refer to
“Connecting a set-top box” on page 22 for connecting
information.
Notes
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
• If a video monitor is connected to this unit via a DVI
connection, you may not take full advantage of the HDMI
features.
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals
being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the
HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic
audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync
feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing
HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature.
y
• You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or
on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT
jack of this unit. Use the “S.AUDIO” parameter in “OPTION
MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
S VIDEO
D/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
D-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
L
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
O
(U.S.A. model)
Optical out
S
PR
PB
Y
HDMI in
V
Component video in
S-video in
Video in
TV (or projector)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and one for the
audio connection)
20 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting other components
converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video
connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the
default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for
“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Notes
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks,
priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
to make the same type of video connections as those made for
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your
other components to the VIDEO jacks.
■ Connecting a DVD player
DVD player
S-video out
Optical out
Coaxial out
Video out
Component video out
Audio out
HDMI out
L
R
C
PR
PB
Y
O
V
S
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
SINGLE
CENTER
L
GND
R
S VIDEO
DVD DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
1
2
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SIRIUS
XM
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
L
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
GND AM
HD Radio
ANTENNA
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
(U.S.A. model)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and one for the
audio connection)
21 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
VCR
S-video out
S-video in
Video in
Audio out
Audio in
Video out
L
R
L
R
V
V
S
S
(U.S.A. model)
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
S VIDEO
DVD DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R
2
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
AC OUTLETS
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
L
S
S
V
V
L
R
L
R
PR
PB
Y
S-video in
Video in
Audio in
Audio out
Component video out
DVD recorder
or PVR
■ Connecting a set-top box
Satellite receiver, cable
TV receiver or HDTV
decoder
S-video out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
Component video out
L
R
PR
PB
Y
V
O
S
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
FRONT (8CH)
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
CENTER
L
GND
R
S VIDEO
DVD DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
PHONO
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
6
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
1
2
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SIRIUS
XM
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
AC OUTLETS
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
R
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
L
(U.S.A. model)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and one for the
audio connection)
22 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting audio components
Notes
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-
output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
CD recorder, MD
recorder or tape deck
Turntable
Audio out
Audio in
L
R
L
R
L
R
O
O
AUDIO
T(8MULTICHINPUTC
PREOUT
F
R
O
N
C
H)
E
N
T
E
R
S
L
GND R
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
IN
O
U
T
IN
O
UT
PHONO
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB(8CH)
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
WOOFER ZONE2
FRONT
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
SU
OUT
HDMI
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
DVD
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
DVR
IN3
1
2
3
6
OUT
O
P
TIC
A
L
C
O
A
XIAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SIRIUS
XM
DIGITALINPUT
SPEAKERS
CENTER
FRONTB/ZONEB/
ZONE2/PRESENCE
R
FRONTA
SURROUND
SURROUNDBACK/BI-AMP
L
EXTRASP
L
R
L
R
L
R
FM
75ΩUNBAL.
GND AM
HDRadio
ANTENNA
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mAMAX.
IN
O
UT
(U.S.A. model)
Coaxial
out
L
R
C
Audio
out
CD player
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the audio connection)
23 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output
or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs
the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
Notes
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 52).
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87).
5
PRE OUT
SINGLE
CENTER
L
R
1
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
1
3
2
4
1
FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
2
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
3
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
Surround back channel output jacks. When you only
connect one external amplifier for the surround back
channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.
Notes
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front
channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks.
• The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see
4
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks
Connect one or two subwoofers with a built-in amplifier.
Note
The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack is the
same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack.
5
CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
24 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-
amplifier.
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH” (see page 97), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
Notes
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
CENTER
L
L
L
*1
R
R
R
SUB
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER
SUB
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player/External
decoder (5.1-channel output)
Multi-format player/External
decoder (7.1-channel output)
y
■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
your Bluetooth components.
dock or Bluetooth adapter
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth
adapter (such as YBA-10 sold separately). Connect a
Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the
DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its
dedicated cable.
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
Yamaha iPod universal dock
or Bluetooth adapter
25 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE
OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with
the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
(U.S.A. model)
Caution
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
GND AM
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
HD Radio
ANTENNA
components before making connections.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
Notes
• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
Remote
Remote
control out
control in
VOLUME
ZONE
ON/OFF
2
ZONE
CONTROL
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
1
2
3
4
Infrared signal
receiver or Yamaha
component
Yamaha component
(CD or DVD player,
etc.)
PROGRAM
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
SYSTEM OFF
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
STANDBY
/ON
SILENT CINEMA
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
y
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
L
R
• If the components have the capability of the SCENE control
signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding
components and start the playback when you use one of the
SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about
the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components.
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not
the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup
S
V
O
L
R
Game console or
video camera
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and
one for the audio connection)
26 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
(U.S.A. model)
Insert
Press and hold
Release
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
Notes
(Canada model)
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
Insert
Open the lever
Close the lever
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity
and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND
terminal.
(U.S.A. model)
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
3
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
4
CD
5
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna
1
2
COAX
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SIRIUS
XM
DIGITAL INPUT
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
(U.S.A. model)
R
EXTRA SP
L
R
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
GND AM
HD Radio
ANTENNA
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33
ft) vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
(Canada model)
27 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the power cable
Setting the speaker impedance
Caution
(U.S.A. model)
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm
speakers can be also used as the front speakers.
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
L
Press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to
turn off this unit.
1
M
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and
2
K
then press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
To the AC wall outlet
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
MAIN ZONE
While holding
TONE CONTROL
down
ON/OFF
■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these 2 outlets is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these 2 outlets, see “Specifications” on page 127.
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select
3
“SP IMP.”.
“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting
(“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display.
M
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to
select “6Ω MIN”.
4
5
Note
The power to AC OUTLETS of this unit is not cut off while this
unit is charging connected iPod even when this unit is in the
standby mode. When this unit completes charging or the iPod is
disconnected, the power is cut off automatically when this unit is
in the standby mode.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.
Note
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
28 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Turning this unit on and off
■ Turning on this unit
K
D
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or POWER) to
turn on this unit.
The main zone is turned on.
y
• When you turn on this unit, there will be delay for a few
seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.
S
• You can also turn on the main zone by pressing SCENE (or
A
SCENE) buttons.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
K
C
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or STANDBY
)
to set the main zone to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
y
L
page 108) to the standby mode simultaneously.
29 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Front panel display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MULTI CH
VCR
qEX
DIGITAL PLUS
TRUE HD
PL x
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
YPAO MEMORY HD
VIRTUAL AUTO TUNED STEREO
SLEEP HOLD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
dB
DOCK
ENHANCER
VOL.
ADAPTIVE DRC
q
q
q
MASTER AUDIO
ZONE 2
SP
AB
MUTE
HD
96
SILENT CINEMA
96/24
LFE
LL C R
ES 24
MATRIX DISCRETE
ft
CS
neural
SL SB SR
ms
dB
SBL
SBR
PCM DSD
0
A
B C D E
F
G
H
I
1
7
HDMI indicator
Tuner indicators
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 18).
Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite
Radio, or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode (see
2
ADAPTIVE DRC indicator
Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control
feature is turned on (see page 91).
Note
HD indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model only and
lights up when this unit is turned into the HD Radio reception
band.
3
DOCK indicator
•
Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see
The DOCK indicator also lights up when this unit is
charging the battery of the stationed iPod in the
standby mode.
8
96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
9
MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator
The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function
is on (see page 45).
•
•
Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter
(such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth
component is in the paring or the Bluetooth adapter is
searching the Bluetooth component (see page 72).
Light up while the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter is
•
Indicates the current volume level.
0
Input signal indicators
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) or DSD (Direct Stream Digital) digital audio
signals.
•
A
Decoder indicators
4
ENHANCER indicator
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
5
Input source indicators
Note
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and
Canada models and CSII indicator is only applicable to
the U.S.A. model.
Note
B
The XM and SIRIUS indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A.
and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator
or SIRIUS indicator lights up only when “XM” or “SIRIUS” is
selected as the input source.
Sound field indicators
Presence sound field
Listening position
6
YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
Surround left
sound field
Surround right
sound field
Surround back sound field
C
Headphone indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 45).
30 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
D
SP A B indicators
Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Light up according to the set of front speakers activated
SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.
SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.
SP A B: The FRONT A and FRONT B speakers are
activated.
Remote control sensor
E
ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 107).
F
DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound
field programs are selected (see page 48).
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
30
30
VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is
active (see page 51).
SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a
sound field program is selected (see page 51).
1
Infrared window (
)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
B
TRANSMIT indicator
G
Multi-information display
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
F
Operation mode selector (
)
H
SLEEP indicator
The function of some buttons depends on the operation
mode selector position.
I
Input channel and speaker indicators
AMP
LFE indicator
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
LFE
LL C R
SL SB SR
Presence speaker indicators
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
Input channel indicators
SBL
SBR
TV
Input channel indicators
4
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
4
PHONO (see page 102).
• Indicate the channel components of the current
digital input signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the
speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
Presence speaker indicators
Light up or flash according to the setting of “EXTRA
SP ASSIGN” when this unit is in the automatic setup
“MANUAL SETUP” (see page 87).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see
page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “SUR.B L/R
31 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM (YPAO)
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Using AUTO SETUP
2
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
“MIC ON View OSD menu” appears in the front
panel display.
Notes
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
y
• Initial settings are indicated in bold.
• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that
appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual
uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
Omni-directional
microphone
• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector
F
on the remote control to AMP.
The following menu screen appears on the video
monitor.
• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker
terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.
AUTOꢀSETUP
. EXTRAꢀSPꢀASSIGNꢀꢀ
FRONTꢀB
1
Make sure of the following check points.
>ZONE2
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZONEꢀBꢀꢀPRESENCEꢀꢀꢀꢀ
NONEꢀ
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL
START
Note
Before starting the automatic setup, check the following
check points.
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Selectꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
[
[
❏
❏
❏
❏
Speakers are connected appropriately.
Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
This unit is selected as the video input source of
the video monitor.
The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
3
Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
❏
❏
Optimizer microphone
The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Controls of a subwoofer (example)
y
❏
The room is sufficiently quiet.
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would
be when you are seated in your listening position. You can
use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer
microphone to the tripod (etc.).
y
If you connect two subwoofers to this unit, the volume level
of each subwoofer is set to slightly less.
32 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Notes
8
Press l / h to select the desired setting
8
for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press n.
4
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change
the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see
page 112) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “BASIC MENU”
Extra speaker assignment
EXTRA SP ASSIGN
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, ZONE B,
PRESENCE, NONE
8
Press l / h to select the desired setting of
“EQ”.
6
• When you use the alternative front speaker
Select “FRONT B”.
Parametric equalizer type EQ
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can
select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment
from the following choices.
Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers
to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2
speakers by using the internal amplifier.
• When you want to use another front
speaker system in Zone B
Select “ZONE B”.
Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT
• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency
response of all speakers with higher frequencies
being all speakers to achieve more natural sound.
Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little
harsh.
• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response
of all speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response
of each speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your front
speakers are of much higher quality than your other
speakers.
Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the
speakers to the presence speakers.
• When you do not use the EXTRA SP
terminals
Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP
terminals.
Note
select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.
8
Press l / h to select “SETUP” and then
8
press n.
5
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the previous
settings.
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”
settings and restore the previous settings.
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”
parameters to the initial factory settings.
33 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
8
Press n to select “START” and then press
7
9
Make sure that the following screen appears
8
8
ENTER to start the setup procedure.
and then press ENTER to display the
The following message appears in the OSD.
When this unit starts the automatic setup procedure,
loud test tones are output at the speakers.
result screen.
AUTOꢀSETUP
ꢀ
For more accurate measurements, keep quiet and
move to the wall where speakers are not around. We
recommend that you leave the listening room during
the automatic setup procedure.
Measurement Complete
Press [ENTER]
NOTICE
Loudꢀtestꢀtonesꢀare
ꢀꢀꢀoutput.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀ
AUTOꢀSETUP
Pleaseꢀkeepꢀquiet
orꢀleaveꢀtheꢀroom.
ꢀ
RESULT
SP
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
:
3/4/0.1
Pressꢀ[ENTER]
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
. >SET CANCEL
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts
the automatic setup procedure.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as
follows:
8
Press ENTER to start the automatic setup
8
procedure.
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this
unit in the following order:
The following screen appears in the OSD and setup
procedure starts in 10 seconds.
Front/Back/Subwoofer
AUTOꢀSETUP
ꢀ
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position in the following order:
MeasurementꢀStart
inꢀ 9ꢀseconds
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
[RETURN]:Cancel
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following
order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output
level
Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the
“RESULT” display appears in the OSD.
Notes
Notes
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack
is the same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT 1 jack. Therefore, even if you connect two
subwoofers, the number of the connected subwoofer is
indicated as “0.1”.
• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit
is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3
minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.
y
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 4.
8
Press k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.
are output.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure,
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on
page 36.
• When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the
number of warning messages appears in the above of
“RESULT” (see page 36).
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR
PHASE:REV” appears during the automatic procedure
and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 89) is automatically set to “REVERSE”.
34 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Notes
8
8
10 Press k and then ENTER to display the
setup results in detail.
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may
be longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
AUTOꢀSETUP
• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the
same frequency to provide finer adjustments.
. RESULT
SP
:
3/4/0.1
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
8
12 Press ENTER to return to the top
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Detail
result display.
AUTOꢀSETUP
RESULT
WIRING
ꢀ
RESULT
SP
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
:
3/4/0.1
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
[ ]
[
[
/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
13 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”
8
11 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between
8
and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to
the setup result displays.
select “SET” or “CANCEL”.
8
Press k / n to toggle between the parameters in a
results.
AUTOꢀSETUP
ꢀ
RESULT
SP
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
(WIRING)
:
3/4/0.1
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
Results of the speaker distance
from the listening position
(DISTANCE)
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
8
14 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
Results of the setting of each
speaker size
(SIZE)
The following screen appears. Disconnect the
optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer
microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from
direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
AUTOꢀSETUP
Results of the parametric
equalizer of each speaker
(EQ)
ꢀAUTOꢀSETUPꢀComplete
Disconnect Microphone
PRESS [ENTER]
[MENU]:Exit
Results of the speaker output level
(LEVEL)
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, use “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 82).
35 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
■ If “WARNING” appears
8
15 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the
top result display. Check the warning messages to correct
your speaker settings.
The top “SET MENU” screen appears in the OSD.
SET MENU
.
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
Note
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1
Make sure the pointer is pointing at
I
16 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET
8
“WARNING” and then press ENTER to
MENU”.
display the detailed information about the
warning.
y
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate
your system.
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates
the number of warning messages.
AUTOꢀSETUP
■ If an error screen appears
. WARNING(3)
RESULT
SP
:
3/4/0.1
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
8
Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or
8
“EXIT” and then press ENTER.
The following display is an example when “E-9:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Detail
8
Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the warning displays.
2
ERROR
. E-9:USER CANCEL
Don't operate
any function
WARNING
>RETRY EXIT
W-1:OUTꢀOFꢀPHASE
Reverse Channel
[ ]
[
[
/[ ]:Select
FL
--
[ENTER]:Enter
CENTER
PL
SL
PR
SR
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
SBL
SBR
[ [
[ ]/[ ]:Select
•
Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
[ENTER]:Return
procedure.
•
Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “––” is displayed instead.
• If “SWFR: TOO LOUD” or “SWFR: TOO LOW” appears
in the “W-3: LEVEL ERROR” display, adjust the volume
level of the subwoofer(s).
y
If “E-5:NOISY” appears, “PROCEED” also appears in the
choices. When you select “PROCEED”, this unit continues the
measurements and settings, but the settings may not be optimal.
8
Press ENTER to return to the top result
display.
3
36 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES
Selecting the SCENE templates
This unit is equipped with 19 preset SCENE templates for
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or set the
2
F
operation mode selector to AMP and then
8
press l / h) to select the desired
template.
SCENE 1: DVD Viewing
SCENE 2: Disc Listening
SCENE 3: TV Viewing
SCENE 4: Radio Listening
DVD MovieꢀView
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
S
A
3
Press the SCENE (or SCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the
SCENE button.
Select the desired SCENE
template
1
or
1
Remote control
Front panel
1
Assign the
SCENE
Note
template to the
SCENE button
Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 41 for details.
SCENE template library
(Image)
Selecting the desired SCENE
template to the SCENE buttons
S
A
1
Press and hold the SCENE (or SCENE)
button for 3 seconds.
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the
front panel starts to flash, and the name of the
currently assigned SCENE template appears in the
front panel display.
3 seconds
3 seconds
1
or
1
Remote control
Front panel
1
Flashes
DVD Viewing
37 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?
Which source do you like to
play back?
Which component do you
like for playback?
Default
SCENE templates
DVD Viewing
SCENE buttons
1
DVD
Video sources
(DVD video,
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Live Viewing
DVR Viewing
Recorded video)
DVR
DVD
Music discs (CD, SA-
CD or DVD-Audio)
Disc Hi-fi Listening
Music Disc Listening
Disc Listening
2
CD Hi-fi Listening
CD Listening
CD
CD Music Listening
Radio programs
4
Radio Listening
XM Listening
TUNER (FM/AM)
XM
SIRIUS
SIRIUS Listening
iPod or Bluetooth
component
*
DOCK
Dock Listening
3
TV Viewing
TV programs
DTV/CBL
TV Sports Viewing
*
Action Game Playing
RPG Playing
Video games
Vinyl records
V-AUX
PHONO
LP Record Listening
Note
*
When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit
plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 40 for details.
38 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions
The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting.
SCENE template
Input source
Playback mode
Straight
Features
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back general
contents on the DVD player.
DVD
DVD Viewing
1
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your DVD player.
DVD
MOVIE
Sci-Fi
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Live Viewing
DVR Viewing
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live
video on your DVD player.
DVD
ENTERTAINMENT
Music Video
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your digital video recorder.
DVR
MOVIE
Drama
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your DVD player.
DVD
Pure Direct
Disc Hi-fi Listening
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs
on your DVD player.
DVD
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Music Disc
Listening
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music
sources on your DVD player as the background music.
DVD
STEREO
7ch Stereo
Disc Listening
2
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your CD player.
CD
Pure Direct
CD Hi-fi Listening
CD Listening
*
CD
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs
on your CD player.
STEREO
7ch Stereo
*
CD
Select this SCENE template when you play back music source
on your CD player as the background music.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
CD Music Listening
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio
programs.
TUNER
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Radio Listening
4
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite
Radio programs.
XM
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
XM Listening
SIRIUS Listening
Dock Listening
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy SIRIUS Satellite
Radio programs.
SIRIUS
V-AUX
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on
your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general
programs on your TV.
DTV/CBL
Straight
TV Viewing
3
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs
on your TV.
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
TV Sports Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play action games such
as car racing and FPS games.
ENTERTAINMENT
Action Game
Action Game
Playing
Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing
games.
V-AUX
ENTERTAINMENT
Roleplaying Game
RPG Playing
Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl records
on your turntable.
PHONO
Pure Direct
LP Record Listening
*
When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE
OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.
39 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Creating your original SCENE
templates
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 19 SCENE
templates to create the original SCENE templates.
8
Press k / n to select the desired parameter
8
of the SCENE template and then l / h to
select the desired value of the selected
parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a
SCENE template:
3
Create an original SCENE
template
Select the desired SCENE
template
• INPUT: The input source component.
• MODE: The active sound field programs,
“Straight” or “Pure Direct” mode.
i n w g V i D e V
D
S C E N E :
A
Press the SCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
4
D
: D V I N P U T
S C E N E
i n w g V i D e V D :
SCENE template library
(Image)
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE
template.
Notes
1
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
A
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input
Assign the SCENE
template to the
SCENE button
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 41 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE
button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,
this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with
the new one.
• The newly created template is only available for the assigned
SCENE button.
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
A
Press and hold the desired SCENE button
for 3 seconds.
■ Rename the SCENE templates
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on
the video monitor.
Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3
8
then press ENTER.
SCENE1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
.pꢀDVDꢀViewingꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[
ꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT: ꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀMODE:ꢀꢀꢀStraightꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
SCENE1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀRENAMEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ-DVDꢀViewingꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Renameꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ[SCENE1]:SETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:EXITꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Character
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[p]/[[]:Positionꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:SETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:CANCELꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
Note
8
Press k / n to select the desired character.
8
Press l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the
space or the desired character.
•
•
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not
A
8
assigned to any of the SCENE buttons, press l / h
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the
menu screen.
9
•
•
Press RETURN to cancel the new name.
8
Press ENTER to confirm the new name.
40 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Using the remote control for the SCENE feature
■ Controlling the input source
components in the SCENE mode
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
■ Setting the input source of the
customized SCENE template on the
remote control
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE.
A
Press the desired SCENE button on the
1
2
remote control.
A
Press the desired SCENE button on the
1
remote control.
A
Press and hold the SCENE button and the
4
desired input selector button ( ).
2
Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
B
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.
3
Keep holding down the buttons pressed in
B
step 2 until the TRANSMIT indicator
flashes twice again.
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
AV
Note
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
CD
A
DOCK
V-AUX
CBL
DTV
MD
CD-R
If the setting of the input source is not successful, the
DVD
DVR
VCR
PHONO
AMP
B
TRANSMIT indicator flashes repeatedly. In this case, repeat
SOURCE
TV
Set to
SOURCE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
the setup procedure.
*
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN
9
AUDIO SEL
0
SLEEP
10
ENT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
RETURN
DISPLAY
MEMORY
INFO
PRG SELECT
REC
SCENE
1
2
3
4
SCENE
buttons
Note
*
These buttons control the input source component. See
page 103 for details of the function of each button.
41 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLAYBACK
Playback
Caution
3
Start playback on the selected source
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
instructions.
tuning instructions.
Radio tuning instructions.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to
J
E
4
5
Rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/–
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
)
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.
y
Basic procedure
• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
• You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or press
PROG l / h repeatedly) to select the
desired sound field program.
y
K
See page 46 to display the input source information on the
video monitor.
The name of the selected sound field program
details about sound field programs.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (4)) to select
2
the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fi
Available input sources
Currently selected sound field program
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
ꢀ ꢀDVD
Note
Currently selected input source
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
y
The corresponding input selector button on the remote
y
control for the currently selected input source lights up for
approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the
remote control, showing which source component is
currently being operated.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• To display information about the currently selected sound
42 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
Selecting the front speaker set
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.
Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT
A and/or FRONT B) on or off.
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
A
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front
speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or
EXTRA SP speaker terminals.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
source.
The active front speaker set changes as follows.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “MULTI
FRONT A
OFF
FRONT B
O
CH” (or press MULTI CH IN).
“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.
FRONT A
and
FRONT B
y
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
Notes
Note
• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or
• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front
speaker setting.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source.
■ Using the Zone B feature
When you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE B” (see
page 87), you can use the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).
A
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in
the main room are muted.
Note
If you select the sound field program and activate the Zone B
speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see
page 51).
43 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
Displaying the current status of
this unit on a video monitor
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor.
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input
jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to the
same input source.
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
J
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The current status screen appears in the OSD.
y
• We recommend that you set the audio input jack select to
“AUTO” in most cases.
STATUSꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀVOL:-40.0dB
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 100).
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMOVIEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fiꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT:ꢀꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀA.SEL:ꢀꢀHDMIꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[DISPLAY]:STATUSꢀOFF
Q
P
Press AUDIO SELECT (or AUDIO SEL)
repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack
select setting.
y
• You can select the amount of time that the current status is
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP”
Available input sources
J
• To turn off the status screen, press DISPLAY again.
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
Note
ꢀA.SEL:ꢀAUTO
The OSD signal is not output at the DVR and VCR VIDEO
OUT jacks and will not be recorded.
Currently selected audio input jack select setting
AUDIO SELECT
Function
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
AUTO
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.
HDMI
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
COAX/OPT
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL
jack
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL
jack
When no signals are input, no sound is
output.
Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
Note
This feature is not available when no digital input jacks
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,
HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when
the HDMI IN jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in
“INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see
page 95).
44 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
Using your headphones
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
VOLUME
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
SYSTEM OFF
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
STANDBY
/ON
SILENT CINEMA
4
Press the input selector buttons ( ) on the
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
remote control to select a video source and then
an audio source.
Audio sources
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
CD
DOCK
V-AUX
CBL
DTV
MD
CD-R
Video sources
DVD
DVR
VCR
PHONO
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 51).
DOCK
V-AUX
CBL
DTV
Notes
Video sources
Audio sources
DVD
DVR
VCR
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
MULTI CH IN
9
Muting the audio output
y
F
G
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
O
press MULTI CH IN.
audio output.
• Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input
G
Press MUTE again to resume the audio output.
y
J
E
• You can also rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/–) to
resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
45 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Notes
Displaying the input source
information
• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
• (U.S.A. model only)
You can display the audio and video information of the
current input signal.
When the HD Radio signals include the flag data, the flag
information appears. We recommend that you select “SUR.
DECODE” to activate the corresponding surround decoder (see
page 79).
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP
I
and then press SET MENU on the remote
1
control.
■ Video information
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
Information
Descriptions
SET MENU
Type of the source video signals and
the video signals output at the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit.
HDMI SIGNAL
.
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
Resolution of the input signal (analog
or HDMI) and the output signal
(HDMI). When input video signals are
composite video or S-video signals,
the input video signals are indicated as
“Composite” or “S-Video”.
HDMI RES.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
8
Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
8
INFO” and then press ENTER.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the OSD.
2
Resolution of the analog video signals
output at the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
ANALOG RES.
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices.
HDMI ERROR
(HDMI MESSAGE)
8
Press l / h to toggle between the audio
and video information displays.
3
4
Note
I
Press SET MENU on the remote control
again to exit from “SET MENU”.
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
HDMI error and message
■ Audio information
Message
Cause
Information
Descriptions
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
DEVICE OVER
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to
analog input.
FORMAT
HDCP authentication failed.
HDCP ERROR
Out of Res.
Out of resolution. The connected monitor is
not compatible with the resolution of the
input video signal.
The number of samples per second taken from
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
SAMPLING
CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
The number of bits passing a given point per
second.
BITRATE
FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or
PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.).
46 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Using the sleep timer
H
Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly
until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLETS (see page 28).
Disappears
Note
SLEEP OFF
Even if this unit is in the standby mode, this unit does not cut off
the power to AC OUTLETS while charging connected iPod (see
page 28).
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
H
then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the
C
K
STANDBY (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main
zone to the standby mode.
amount of time.
H
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60min
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field
program.
Flashes
SLEEP
ꢀSLEEP 120min.
Lights up
SLEEP
ꢀꢀStraight
47 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field programs
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set the
F
operation mode selector to AMP and then
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
K
press PROG l / h repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
• When you play back the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
sources, this unit does not activate any sound field program.
• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher
than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.
Sound field program descriptions
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend that you use the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).
Notes
• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 87).
CLASSICAL
Program
Descriptions
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish
wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the
center left of the arena.
Hall in Munich
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all
around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Vienna
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It
offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
48 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
LIVE/CLUB
Program
Descriptions
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound
field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
Cellar Club
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The
listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Roxy Theatre
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once.
The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
■ For various sources
Notes
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 87).
ENTERTAINMENT
Program
Descriptions
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with
enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned
clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the
listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
Sports
This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the
reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment
with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of
directions.
Action Game
This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field
effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of
the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.
Roleplaying Game
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The
listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the
vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 79 for details.
Notes
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 87).
MOVIE
Program
Descriptions
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original
acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the
concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from
the left, right and rear.
Standard
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an
excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and
special effects-featuring movies.
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation
between dialog, sound effects and background music.
49 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
Program
Descriptions
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded
widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation
between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
Adventure
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious
dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling,
reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center
positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater.
The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a
comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
Mono Movie
Note
The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
STEREO
Program
Descriptions
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit
downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates
a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
7ch Stereo
■ The Compressed Music Enhancer
MUSIC ENHANCER
Program
Descriptions
Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-
channel compression artifacts.
Straight Enhancer
7ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
■ Surround decode mode
SUR. DECODE
Program
Descriptions
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on
Sur. Decoder
50 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources (Straight decoding mode)
When this unit is in the “Straight” mode, 2-channel stereo
sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Note
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.
O
N
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) to select
“Straight”.
■ Deactivating the “Straight” mode
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to sound field
CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display.
O
N
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) so that
“Straight” disappears from the front panel
display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
Notes
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “Pure Direct” (see
51 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Using audio features
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode
is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with
the least circuitry.
Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
P
Q
Press PURE DIRECT (or PURE DIRECT)
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.
P
The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
Note
while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel
display automatically dims.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
Notes
7
Press LEVEL on the remote control and
1
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
8
then k / n repeatedly to select the speaker
you want to adjust.
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level
settings)
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
Display
FRONT L
FRONT R
CENTER
SUR. L
SUR. R
SBL
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
Center speaker
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation
is performed.
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Subwoofer
Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front left and right speaker channels.
SBR
SWFR
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
Presence left speaker
Presence right speaker
PRNS L
PRNS R
M
1
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
y
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
• When the video monitor is turned on, the “LEVEL”
adjustment menu appears in the video monitor.
N
2
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
the low-frequency response (BASS).
Control range: –6 dB to +6 dB
8
Press l / h to adjust the speaker output
level.
2
3
8
• Press h to increase the value.
8
• Press l to decrease the value.
Notes
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the
surround speakers may not match.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input
source.
7
Press LEVEL to turn off the speaker level
adjustment display.
52 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM tuning
Overview
You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired FM/AM station:
Frequency tuning mode (AUTO TUNING/MANUAL TUNING)
You can search or specify the frequency of the desired FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “Basic tuning
operations” on this page).
Preset tuning mode (PRESET TUNING)
You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and then recall the station by specifying the preset group and
Note
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Manual tuning mode (MANUAL TUNING)
Basic tuning operations
Use this feature if the signal from the station you
want to select is weak and you cannot tune by using
the automatic tuning. When this unit is in the manual
tuning mode, “MANUAL TUNING” appears in the
front panel display for a moment.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
4
press TUNER.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
2
3
AꢀFM 88.9MHz
No colon (:)
4
TUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
y
• Manually tuning into an FM station automatically
switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the
signal quality.
C
7
Press BAND (or BAND) to select the
reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
• (U.S.A. model only)
If you tune into a hybrid HD Radio station by using the
manual tuning mode, this nit automatically selects the
analog radio service. You cannot select the HD Radio
B
I
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) to select the desired tuning mode.
Automatic tuning mode (AUTO TUNING)
Use this feature when the signal from the station you
want to select is strong.
When this unit is in the automatic tuning mode,
“AUTO TUNING” appears in the front panel display
for a moment. The AUTO indicator appears in the
front panel display.
Preset tuning mode (PRESET TUNING)
Use this feature to recall the preset stations. When
this unit is in the preset tuning mode, “PRESET
TUNING” appears in the front panel display for a
moment. Frequency tuning is not possible. See
Lights up
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
4
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to tune into
AUTO
the desired station.
E
8
• Press h (or k) to tune into a higher
AꢀFM 88.9MHz
No colon (:)
frequency.
E
8
• Press l (or n) to tune into a lower frequency.
53 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM tuning
y
• When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up.
Using station preset feature
• Hold down the button to continue searching when this unit is in
the manual tuning mode.
Use this feature to store up to 40 stations FM/AM stations
(A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset
station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by
using the automatic or manual preset tuning features in
advance (see “Automatic station preset” and “Manual
G
0
• Press INFO (or INFO) repeatedly to toggle the frequency
information and sound field program information in the front
panel.
• (U.S.A. model only)
If the station that this unit is tuned into is an HD Radio station,
you can toggle the HD Radio information in the front panel
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
G
0
page 58 for details.
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
4
press TUNER.
• (U.S.A. model only)
If the station that you tune this unit into is the HD Radio station,
the HD indicator also appears in the front panel display. See
page 57 for details about the HD Radio features.
B
I
1
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
TUNING”.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired
4
press TUNER.
8
preset station number (A1 to E8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
■ Direct frequency tuning
Use this feature tune into the desired station directly by
entering the frequency.
7
1
Press BAND on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired reception
band.
A1:FM 88.9MHz
Preset group and preset station number
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
y
B
I
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “AUTO TUNING”
or “MANUAL TUNING”.
D
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing A/
B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
8
Note
• (U.S.A. model only)
When you recall one of the sub-audio program (HD2 to HD8)
of an FM HD Radio station, it takes a few seconds for this unit
to recall the desired program. While this unit recalls the sub-
audio program, this unit outputs the sound of the analog service
of the station.
AꢀFM 88.9MHz
No colon (:)
y
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual
• (U.S.A. model only)
B
tuning is not possible. Press SEARCH MODE (or
If the selected sub-audio program is currently not available, this
unit is tuned into the main audio program, and if the main audio
program is also not available, this unit is tuned into the analog
service.
I
SRCH MODE) to turn the colon (:) off.
3
Enter the frequency of the desired station by
6
pressing the numeric buttons ( ).
Example: To tune into 103.7 MHz
3
7
0
1
y
If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM/AM tuning,
“WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel display and
then this unit automatically tunes into the last selected station.
54 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM tuning
■ Automatic station preset
Notes
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in
order.
• (U.S.A. model only)
When this unit stores the FM HD Radio stations with this
feature, this unit stores only the main audio program of the
stations (HD1). When you want to store the sub-audio programs
of the FM HD Radio stations, preset the stations manually.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for
all the available stations and copy the stored stations to the rest
preset station numbers.
(U.S.A. model only)
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 AM HD Radio, FM HD Radio, and analog FM radio
stations with strong signals.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
4
TUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
• (Canada model only)
source.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength or an AM radio station,
tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual
(U.S.A. model)
C
7
2
Press BAND (or BAND) to select the
desired reception band.
■ Manual station preset
Use this feature to store the AM or FM stations with weak
signals manually.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
This unit searches the stations in the selected band
and then another band.
(U.S.A. model only)
You can store the analog AM/FM radio stations and AM/
FM HD Radio stations manually, and you can also store
the sub-audio programs of FM HD Radio station.
(Canada model)
C
7
2
Press BAND (or BAND) to select “FM”
as the reception band.
1
Tune into a station.
See page 53 for tuning instructions.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
y
F
Press and hold MEMORY (or
(U.S.A. model only)
To store a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2
3
9
MEMORY) for more than 3 seconds.
0
to HD8), press PRG SELECT b / a repeatedly to
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.
F
9
2
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
Flash
MEMORY
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM 88.9MHz
Flashes
Flashes
y
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the
MEMORY indicator disappears.
F
To cancel the preset memory mode, press MEMORY (or
9
MEMORY) again.
y
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores
D
8
FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) and
E
then PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
8
(or PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly after you perform step 3
to select the preset station number under which the first station
will be stored.
F
• To cancel the automatic station preset, press MEMORY (or
9
MEMORY) again.
55 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM tuning
■ Exchanging preset stations
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
3
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a
preset station group and number (A1 to E8)
while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
E
8
• Press h (or k) to select a higher preset
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
station group and number.
4
press TUNER.
E
8
• Press l (or n) to select a lower preset station
group and number.
D
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
1
2
Flashes
E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
MEMORY
B
Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
A1:FM 88.9MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
y
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing
Flashes
D
8
A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
MEMORY
F
9
4
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY) while
the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
E1:FM 88.9MHz
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
Flashes
D
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
Flashes
MEMORY
A5:FM 88.9MHz
Flashes
B
4
Press EDIT again.
“EXCHANGE E1-A5” appears in the front panel
display and the assignments of the two preset stations
are exchanged.
56 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING HD RADIO™ FEATURES (U.S.A. MODEL ONLY)
Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.
Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.
Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a
single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.ibiguity.com/”.
This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM
stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,
program types, and comments) from supplemental program services (HD1 to HD8).
y
When the HD Radio signals include the audio signal flag data (“Neural”, etc.), the flag information appears in the “SIGNAL INFO”
screen (see page 46). We recommend that you select “SUR. DECODE” as the sound field program and activate the surround decoder
Notes
• The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, if you tune into a hybrid HD Radio
station by using the manual tuning mode, this unit automatically selects the analog radio service. Use the automatic tuning mode,
preset tuning mode, or direct frequency tuning to tune into the desired HD Radio station (see pages 53 and 54).
• This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive
all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital
6
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
0
Press PRG SELECT b / a on the remote
control repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio
audio programs.
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
4
press TUNER.
The HD indicator may disappear from the front panel
display while toggling between data programs.
Selecting HD Radio™ audio
programs
y
You can also select the desired HD Radio audio program by
pressing the numeric key. While this unit is in the automatic or
Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio
programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner
mode. Each audio program contains data programs.
When the selected FM HD Radio station provides some
audio programs, currently selected audio program number
appears in the front panel display as follows.
6
manual tuning mode, press a numeric button (1-8) ( ) and then
H
ENT.
Notes
• Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM
broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are
available for FM broadcasts. The audio programs from HD2 to
HD8 can be selected only when they contain data programs.
• When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator
disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is
HD
AꢀFMꢀ88.9MHz2
Currently selected audio program
automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds.
• Some audio programs may not contain data programs
depending on the broadcasting station and the time period.
57 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)
■ Video monitor
Displaying HD Radio™ information
Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in
the front panel display or video monitor.
J
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following information is displayed in the video
monitor.
■ Front panel display
[5]
[6]
TUNERꢀInformationꢀꢀANT:
G
0
Press INFO (or INFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following HD Radio information
displays.
[1]
[2]
A1:FMꢀ88.9MHz2ꢀꢀPRESET
WXYZ-FMꢀHDꢀ<2/3>
:ClassicꢀRock
[7]
[8]
:FrankieꢀZipper
e.g.) A FM 88.9MHz2
STATION INFO 1
:RoadꢀtoꢀIndia
:Made-to-order
[3]
[4]
Preset station group and number/Frequency/Audio
program (only when multiple audio programs are
available)
[1] Preset station Category and number/
frequency/Audio program (only when multiple
audio programs are available)
e.g.) WXYZ-FM <2/3>
STATION INFO 2
[2] Program category
[3] Song title
Station name/Audio program (only when multiple audio
programs are available)
[4] Album title
e.g.) Classic Rock
e.g.) Frankie Zipper
e.g.) Made-to-order
CATEGORY INFO
[5] Antenna reception level
[6] Tuning mode (see page 53)
Program category
[7] Station name/Audio program (only when
multiple audio programs are available)
SONG INFO
[8] Artist name
Artist name/Song title
y
• To turn off the displayed information screen, press
J
DISPLAY again.
ALBUM INFO
8
• Press ENTER repeatedly to hold and release the current HD
Radio information. While this unit is holding the information,
the “HOLD” appears in the OSD.
Album title
• You can set the time for which the HD Radio information is
displayed in the video monitor by using the “OSD-SOURCE”
parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 98).
ANTENNA INFO
-
e.g.) ANTENNA
• The current HD Radio reception level appears on the top of the
HD Radio information screen. For the best reception, adjust the
Antenna reception level
orientation of the antenna so that “
here.
” or “
” is displayed
• When this unit is tuned into an analog FM/AM radio station,
“TUNER Information” appears as follows.
e.g.) The Bottom Line
DSP PROG. INFO
Sound field program
TUNERꢀInformationꢀꢀANT:
A1:FMꢀ98.7MHzꢀꢀꢀPRESET
AAAA____ANALOG
:
:
Back to “STATION INFO 1”
:
:
y
• You can set the front panel display mode by using “FL
8
• Press ENTER repeatedly to hold and release the current HD
Radio information. While this unit is holding the information,
the HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display.
58 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
XM Satellite Radio tuning
XM Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio,
stand-up comedy, children’s and entertainment programming. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio quality from
coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan.
XM Satellite Radio online information
For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/
For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/
Note
The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
XM READY legal disclaimer
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM
service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees
and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent
explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XM-RADIO (US
residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial- free channels and advertising-
supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement available at www.xmradio.com (US residents) and www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48
contiguous United States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.
■ Enjoying XM HD Surround content
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM
Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (see page 80).
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock
Connect the XM Mini-Tuner and the XM Dock (sold
separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.
For details, see the operating instructions provided with
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock.
y
To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly
facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”
information in the front panel or “XM Information” screen in the
and adjust the orientation of the antenna.
XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock
(sold separately)
Note
If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in
the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna,
L
GND
R
PHONO
CD
MD/CD-R
1
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SIRIUS
XM
59 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
Activating XM Satellite Radio
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock,
Basic XM Satellite Radio
operations
inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to
®
your XM Ready home audio system, and installed the
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving
XM programming. There are three places to find your
eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on
the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0.
Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares
for reference.
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
XM) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio
information (such as channel number, channel name,
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel appears in the front panel display.
1
4
Note
Lights up
The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at
http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-
967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada
online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR
(1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will
send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup.
Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy
periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio
system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup
on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
001ꢀPreview
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
Notes
• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio”
remedies.
2
Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on page 61.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
y
• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD
surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in
page 62).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front
60 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
3
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change
4
press XM.
the preset channel number (1 to 8).
■ All Channel Search mode
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
6
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) ( ).
B
I
1
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH
SEARCH”.
■ Direct number access mode
I
1
Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
2
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within all channels.
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
desired three-digit channel number.
2
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
E
8
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n).
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
• To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front
panel display, select channel “0”.
6
numeric buttons ( ) as shown below.
■ Category Search mode
3
1
2
B
I
1
2
3
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
y
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
6
numeric buttons ( ) on the remote control and then press
repeatedly to change the channel category.
H
ENT to confirm the input number.
H
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit
confirms the entered channel number.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
8
6
H
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons ( ) or ENT
for a channel within the selected channel
category.
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
E
8
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n).
■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset
y
The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “001
Preview”.
B
I
1
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
SEARCH”.
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
61 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
3
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
8
(or PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select
4
press XM.
a preset channel group and number (A1 to
E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
preset channels
Flashes
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
MEMORY
C5 043ꢀXMU
Selected preset channel group and number
y
1
Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing
D
8
A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
F
9
4
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY) to set
the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a
preset channel while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
page 60 for details.
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
043ꢀXMU
Currently selected channel number
F
9
2
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
C5:043ꢀXMU
Colon (:)
MEMORY
Note
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in
the same preset channel group and number is cleared.
Flashes
Note
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
62 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
y
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 98).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
4
press XM.
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front
panel display or in the OSD.
8
• To hold the current XM Raido information, press ENTER on
the remote control while it is being displayed. The HOLD
indicator flashes in the front panel display while you are
8
holding the XM information. Press ENTER again to release
the held information.
• When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Dock cannot receive
the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel display.
Note
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
“Troubleshooting” on page 113 for appropriate remedies.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the OSD
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
J
Press DISPLAY.
information in the front panel display
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
G
0
Press INFO (or INFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following XM Satellite Radio
information display modes.
[4]
XMꢀInformationꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀANT:
[1]
[2]
[3]
ALLꢀCHꢀSEARCH
043:XMU
:Rock
[5]
[6]
e.g.) 043 XMU
CHANNEL INFO
:Coldplay
Channel number/name
:Speedꢀofꢀsound
e.g.) ROCK
CATEGORY INFO
Channel category
[1] Search mode (see page 60)
[2] Channel category
[3] Song title
e.g.) Coldplay / Sp
SONG INFO
Artist name / Song title
[4] Antenna reception level
[5] Channel number/name
[6] Artist name
ANTENNA INFO
e.g.) 043
ANT:
-
y
Channel number/Antenna reception level
J
• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again.
• XM status messages also appear in the OSD.
• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-
e.g.) 7ch Enhancer
DSP PROG. INFO
Sound field program
8
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information, press ENTER
on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD.
“HOLD” appears in the screen while you are holding the XM
8
information. Press ENTER again or change the XM Satellite
Back to “CHANNEL INFO”
Radio channel to release the held information.
• The current XM Satellite Radio reception level appears on the
top of the XM Satellite Radio information screen. For the best
reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock
so that “
” or “
” is displayed here. “
” is displayed if
the antenna cannot receive the signals correctly. In this case,
adjust the orientation of the antenna (see page 59).
63 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ TUNING
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only
SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From
authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100%
commercial-free.
SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your
subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games
are broadcast during their respective seasons.)
Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don't forget a host of other
great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more
information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer
SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers
with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed
at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The
orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs
Connecting the SiriusConnect™
tuner
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the
depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals
SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see
supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the
the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect
tuner.
antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or
“SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor (see
page 69) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the
orientation of the antenna.
SiriusConnect™ tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall
outlet.
Notes
• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in
the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect
tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the
connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna (see
page 118).
L
T
N
A
V
5
GND
R
C
D
PHONO
CD
MD/CD-R
1
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this
unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.
DIGITAL
SIRIUS
XM
OUTPUT
To the AC wall outlet
FM
64 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
Activating SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ subscription
Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
operations
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need
to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To
activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is
uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is
12-digit number and it appears on the package of the
SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect
tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel “0” (see below).
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
4
SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights
up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio information (such as channel number, channel
name, category, artist name, or song title) for the
currently selected channel appears in the front panel
display.
■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner
1
2
Set the operation mode selector on the
F
remote control to SOURCE and then press
Lights up
4
SIRIUS.
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
6
H
Press 0 and then ENT to display the
Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.
“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”
indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect
tuner) appears in the front panel display.
184 SIRIUS Wea
y
When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
y
Notes
G
0
To scroll the message again, press INFO (or INFO).
• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you
can only select “184” or “000”.
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or in the OSD, see the “SIRIUS Satellite
appropriate remedies.
Write the Sirius ID below.
ID:
3
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate
your subscription.
2
Search for a channel by using one of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
y
Status messages appear in the front panel display or video
monitor during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite
“SUB UPDATED” appears.
y
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL
888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears in the front panel
G
display. To scroll the message again, press INFO (or
0
INFO).
page 67).
• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the
65 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
■ Preset Search mode
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
4
press SIRIUS.
■ All Channel Search mode
B
I
1
2
3
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
SEARCH”.
B
I
1
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH
SEARCH”.
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
2
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within all channels.
y
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
PRESET/TUNING/CH
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change
E
8
l
/
h
(or PRESET/CH
k
/
n).
the preset channel number (1 to 8).
D
8
pressing CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h).
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
■ Category Search mode
6
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) ( ).
B
I
1
2
3
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
■ Direct number access mode
I
1
Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
desired three-digit channel number.
2
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within the selected channel
category.
8
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
6
numeric buttons ( ) as shown below.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
3
1
2
E
8
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n).
Note
y
This unit skips the channels when this unit is All Channel Search
mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not
malfunction of this unit):
– the channel is out of service.
• To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel
display, select channel “0”.
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
numeric buttons ( ) on the remote control and then press
6
H
ENT to confirm the input number.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.
H
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit
confirms the entered channel number.
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a
one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms
the entered channel number.
• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears in the front
panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number
6
H
by using the numeric buttons ( ) or press ENT to cancel
66 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
y
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
D
8
A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
4
press SIRIUS.
F
9
4
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY) to set
the selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel
as a preset channel while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
Setting the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ preset channels
You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
A1:023 Hair Na
Colon (:)
1
Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio search modes.
Note
page 65 for details.
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in
the same preset channel group and number is cleared.
Setting the Parental Lock
You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access
to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit
automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is
in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode
001 SIRIUS Hit
Currently selected channel number
F
9
2
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
E
and you search a channel by pressing PRESET/
8
TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n).
■ Setting the code number and the locked
channels
Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number
(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.
MEMORY
Flashes
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP
1
Note
I
on the remote control and then press SET
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
MENU to display.
8
Press n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and
8
then press ENTER.
2
3
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
3
8
(or PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select
a preset channel group and number (A1 to
E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
8
Press n repeatedly to select “INPUT
8
MENU” and then press ENTER.
Flashes
MEMORY
A1ꢀ023 Hair Na
Currently selected preset channel group and
number
67 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
Note
8
Press k / n repeatedly to select “SIRIUS”
8
and then press ENTER.
The following menu screen appears.
4
In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit
outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the channel
is locked. Only the first eight characters of each channel
name are displayed in the list.
A) SIRIUS
. INPUTꢀRENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
PARENTAL LOCK
8
10 Press ENTER to lock the selected
channel.
Check mark appears before the locked channel.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
y
8
When you select the locked channel and press ENTER,
this unit unlocks the selected channel.
8
Press n repeatedly to select “PARENTAL
8
LOCK” and then press ENTER.
“NEW PIN:0000” appears.
5
you want.
PARENTAL LOCK
9
12 Press RETURN to exit from the
-
NEWꢀPIN:0000
“PARENTAL LOCK” screen.
[0] [9]:NUMBER
[ENT]:Enter
I
13 Press SET MENU to exit from the setup
menu.
This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in
the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is
locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather
& Emergency” or “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx”
(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the Sirius ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner).
Note
If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to this unit, “Not
Available” appears.
y
If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN:___”
appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”. Refer to step 8 and
then proceed the operations.
y
• If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number,
use “SR PIN” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to reset the Parental
Lock code number.
channels are unlocked.
6
Enter the desired 4-digit code number by
using the numeric buttons ( ).
6
y
■ Tuning into the locked channels
9
Press RETURN to return the previous menu level
without setting the code number.
You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct
number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you
tune into the locked channel, following message appears
in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set
for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons
8
7
8
9
Press ENTER to confirm the code number.
“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel
operations.
6
H
(
) or press ENT to cancel the tuning.
Enter the 4-digit code number you set at step
6 above to unlock the protection.
When the code number is correct, “OK” and then the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears.
____
PIN:
Notes
8
Press l / h repeatedly to select the
desired channel category and then press
• If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the
front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously
selected channel.
• If a channel is unlocked, you can also select the channel in
Zone2.
8
k / n repeatedly to select the channel you
want to lock.
68 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
y
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 98).
• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character
that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
4
press SIRIUS.
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ information
You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
(such as channel number, channel name, category, artist
name, composer name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD.
• To hold the current SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press
8
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed.
8
Press ENTER again to release the held information.
• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the
signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
Note
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information in the OSD
■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
J
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
information in the front panel display
G
0
Press INFO (or INFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information display modes.
[5]
SIRIUSꢀInformationꢀANT:
[1]
[2]
ALLꢀCHꢀSEARCH
008:Bigꢀ'80s
:Pop
[6]
[7]
e.g.) 008 Big '80s
CHANNEL INFO
:Sanumemo
Channel number/name
[3]
[4]
:RoadꢀtoꢀIndia
C:FrankieꢀZipper
e.g.) Pop
CATEGORY INFO
[1] Search mode (see page 65)
[2] Channel category
[3] Song title
Channel category
e.g.) Sanumemo / Roa
e.g.) Frankie Zipper
SONG INFO
[4] Composer name
[5] Antenna reception level
[6] Channel number/name
[7] Artist name
Artist name / Song title
COMPOSER INFO
Composer name
y
J
• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again.
• SIRIUS status messages also appear in the OSD.
• You can select the amount of time the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-
• To hold the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press
ANTENNA INFO
e.g.) 043
ANT:
-
Channel number/Antenna reception level
8
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in
the OSD. While this unit is holding the information screen,
“HOLD” appears in the OSD.
e.g.) 7ch Enhancer
DSP PROG. INFO
• The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while
Sound field program
8
you are holding the SIRIUS information. Press ENTER
again or change the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel to release
the held information.
Back to “CHANNEL INFO”
69 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING IPOD™
Using iPod™
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 25), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You
can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts
(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 50).
Notes
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or
not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 96). The
DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.
Controlling iPod™
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with
the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Remote control operation
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then
4
press V-AUX.
y
Button
Function
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod
(some models only).
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
8
ENTER
k
Subsequent menu
Menu up
n
Menu down
l
Previous menu
Subsequent menu
h
0
ll
hh
a
b
s
Search backward (Press and hold)
Search forward (Press and hold)
Skip forward
Skip backward
Stop
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
p
Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
I
J
MENU
Previous menu
Display
DISPLAY
70 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using iPod™
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod
in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for
your iPod to suit your personal preferences.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
•
•
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
•
Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
y
• The name of the song being played also appears in the front
panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 98).
y
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “
” appears
• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Notes
Choices: Off, One, All
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
•
•
•
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in
8
8
the OSD. Press ENTER or k/n repeatedly on the remote
control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy
watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
y
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “
”
1
All
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of
songs are being repeated.
■ The function of the play information
1
Set the operation mode selector to
display
F
J
SOURCE and then press DISPLAY on
[1]
[7]
[8]
the remote control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
iPodꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[Play]ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
All
[2]
[3]
[4]
ꢀ1ꢀ/ꢀ9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFrankieꢀZipperꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMade-to-orderꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀRoadꢀtoꢀIndiaꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;ꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ0:51ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ-7:44ꢀꢀ
iPod
Top
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
[9]
Composers
Settings
[5]
[6]
[10]
8
Press k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod
2
[1] Playback status
[2] Track number/total tracks
[3] Artist name
8
menu and then press ENTER to begin
playback of the selected song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums
(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),
Composers (composers), Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
[4] Song title
[5] Progress bar
• Artists > Albums > Songs
[6] Elapsed time
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
[7] Shuffle and repeat icons
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
[8]
(playback),
(pausing),
(search
forward) and
(search backward)
[9] Name of the album
[10] Remaining time
71 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS
Using Bluetooth™ components
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and
enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between
this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your
Bluetooth component in advance.
Note
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter
and your Bluetooth component
If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth
component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.
panel display.
4
5
Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in
the Bluetooth device list.
y
• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you
use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other
component with which Bluetooth communications are to be
established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s
operating instructions.
Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.
When the pairing procedure is successful,
There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START
PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.
“Completed” appears in the front panel display.
Note
■ Pairing by using “SET MENU”
Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor.
Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See
page 97 for details.
The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight
Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the
pairing data for the least recently used other component is
cleared.
■ Quick pairing
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or set the
1
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or set the
1
F
operation mode selector to SOURCE and
F
operation mode selector to SOURCE and
4
then press V-AUX) to select “V-AUX” as
the input source.
4
then press V-AUX) to select “V-AUX” as
the input source.
2
Start playback of your Bluetooth component.
When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the
Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the
DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display.
2
3
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with.
C
7
Press and hold BAND (or BAND) for 3
seconds to start pairing.
y
8
• When you press ENTER on the remote control, the
connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter
cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in
the front panel display.
Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing,
“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the
Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK
indicator flashes in the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth
y
9
component, press RETURN.
C
7
To cancel the pairing, press BAND (or BAND) again.
72 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECORDING
Recording
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
Caution
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being
recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and
adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your
DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output
from the player.
Notes
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 52) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 52) and the sound field programs (see page 48)
do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• The XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• HD Radio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks and DIGITAL OUTPUT jack for recording.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT (REC) channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.
3
4
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one
4
of the input selector buttons ( )) to select
the source component you want to record
from.
Start recording on the recording component.
73 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
Advanced sound configurations
Changing sound field parameter
settings
K
Press PROG l / h repeatedly to select
the desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
3
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
8
Press k / n to select the desired sound
8
field parameter and then l / h to change
4
the selected sound field parameter value.
Note
8
• Press h to increase the value.
8
• Press l to decrease the value.
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see
page 100). If you want to change the sound field parameter
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 76.
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
R
and then press PARAMETER on the
remote control.
8
In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages.
• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,
The following screen is shown in the OSD.
8
press n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then press
8
h. Once the confirmation screen appears in the OSD, press
Sound field program category
8
8
h to confirm or l to cancel the initialization.
MOVIE
1/2
MOVIE
2/2
.
Sci-Fi
Cursor
SUR.;;PLIIx Movie
DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0
Sci-Fi
SB INIT.DLY;;15ms
SB ROOM SIZE;;1.0
DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0
. INITIALIZE
Select
[p]/[[]:
Initialize
[[]:
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
R
Press PARAMETER to turn off the sound
field parameter screen.
5
74 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
(DIALG.LIFT)
■ Basic configuration of sound field
programs
Each sound field program has some parameters defining
the characteristics of the program. To customize the
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/
or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
y
The ideal
dialogue
position.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound
field programs (DSP LEVEL)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field
in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to
adjust the level of the effect sounds.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”.
Move up to the ideal dialogue position.
The DSP effect
sound level is low.
The DSP effect sound
level is high.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the
highest position.
Adjust “DSP LEVEL” in the following cases:
Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL”
• The effect sound of the selected sound field
program is too weak.
• You cannot recognize any difference between the
sound field programs.
Notes
• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”
is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial
dialogue position.
Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL”
• The sound is vague.
• You feel that the additional sound effect is
excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
75 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations
Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.
y
Sound field parameter
Features
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the
apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the
first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to
the reflection face.
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the
corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the
CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
76 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
Features
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the
corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the
CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual
walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of
a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one
which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to
as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter
lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Live
Dead
Time
Time
Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
77 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
Features
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
REV.TIME
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Reverberation
Source sound
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
60 dB
60 dB
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
REV.DELAY
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
REV.DELAY
REV.TIME
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
REV.LEVEL
Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound
(dB)
REV. LEVEL
Time
78 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
Features
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
DIRECT
(“2ch Stereo” only)
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer
in the following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87).
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence
right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The
available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
(“7ch Stereo” only)
Control range: 0 to 100%
Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.
EFFECT LEVEL
(“Straight Enhancer” and
“7ch Enhancer” only)
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
■ Selecting decoders used with sound
field programs (SUR.)
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).
See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field
program.
Selecting decoders
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-
channels.
Available decoders
Decoder
Functions
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro
Logic II) processing for movie
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder
is not available when “SUR.B L/R
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
M
then press SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the
remote control to select the desired surround
decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
DTS processing for movie sources.
Neo:6 Cinema
y
F
R
the operation mode to AMP and then press PARAMETER
8
to display the decoder parameters in the OSD. Press k / n
repeatedly to select the desired decoder parameter and then press
8
l / h repeatedly to change the value of the selected
parameter.
79 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
■ Decoder descriptions (SUR.)
Decoder
Descriptions
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder
PLIIx Game
PLII Game
DTS processing for movie sources.
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
SRS Circle Surround II processing for movie sources.
CSII Cinema
(U.S.A. model only)
SRS Circle Surround II processing for music sources.
CSII Music
(U.S.A. model only)
Neural Surround processing for any sources.
The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals and analog 2-channel input sources.
When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is
selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any
additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in
stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM
Satellite Radio.
Neural Sur.
(U.S.A. and Canada models
only)
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.
80 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Decoder parameter descriptions
Decoder parameter
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
PANORAMA
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Choices: OFF, ON
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
DIMENSION
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
CENTER WIDTH
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
C. IMAGE
(“Neo:6 Music” only)
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)
Initial setting: 0.3
SRS CSII Movie and SRS CSII Music focus. Adjusts the clearness of a sound image by elevating the
perception of the sound image to compensate for non-optimally placed speakers from a lower location.
A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level.
FOCUS
(“CSII Movie” and “CSII
Music” only)
Control range: 0 (lower location) to 8 (higher location)
SRS CSII Movie and CSII Music TruBass. Adjusts the lower register by producing the perception of
improved low frequency performance. A larger value improves bass even without a subwoofer and
provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer.
TruBass
(“CSII Movie” and “CSII
Music” only)
Control range: 0 (standard low-frequency performance) to 8 (enhanced low-frequency performance)
81 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Page
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP
speaker terminal.
87
EXTRA SP ASSIGN
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the
low-frequency signals.
LFE/BASS OUT
Selects the size of the front speakers.
FRONT SP
Selects the size of the center speaker.
CENTER SP
Selects the size and number of the surround speakers.
Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers.
SUR. L/R SP
SUR.B L/R SP
CROSS OVER
Selects the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or
Switches the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or
unclear.
SUBWOOFER PHASE
Adjust the balance the speaker levels between the front left or
surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET”
FR.L/FR.R/CNTR/
SUR.L/SUR.R/
SBL/SBR/SWFR/
PR.L/PR.R
B)SP LEVEL
Selects the unit to adjust the speaker distance.
90
90
UNIT
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the
respective channel.
FRONT L/FRONT R/
CENTER/SUR. L/
SUR. R/SBL/SBR/
SWFR/PRNS L/
PRNS R
—
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP
LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.
90
D)TEST TONE
82 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Volume menu 2 VOLUME MENU
Parameter
Functions
Page
Selects whether this unit automatically adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the
volume level or not.
ADAPTIVE DRC
Selects whether this unit adjusts the DSP effect level automatically in conjunction with the
volume level or not.
ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL
Sets the maximum volume level of the main zone.
91
91
MUTE TYPE
MAX VOL.
Sets the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on.
INIT. VOL.
Sound menu 3 SOUND MENU
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Page
Selects the type of equalizer.
EQ TYPE SELECT
GEQ
A)EQUALIZER
Adjusts the tonal quality of the speakers when you set “EQ TYPE
SELECT” to “GEQ”.
92
Selects whether this unit outputs the test tone while making
adjustments of “GEQ” or not.
TEST
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
93
93
93
SPEAKER
B)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
HEADPHONE
SPEAKER
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the speakers.
C)DYNAMIC
RANGE
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the
headphones.
HEADPHONE
Selects whether this unit activates the automatic audio and video
synchronization function (automatic lip sync) or not.
94
94
94
HDMI AUTO
AUTO
D)LIPSYNC
Makes fine adjustments of the audio delay when the automatic audio
and video synchronization function is active.
Adjustment the audio delay manually when the connected video
monitor is not compatible with the automatic audio and video
synchronization function or “HDMI AUTO” is set to “OFF”.
MANUAL
—
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES
decoders by using the connected surround back speakers.
E)EXTD SUR.
83 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Input menu 4 INPUT MENU
Note
Some parameters described below may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input
sources.
Parameter
Functions
Page
Assigns the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of
this unit do not correspond to your needs.
I/O ASSIGNMENT
Changes the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
Adjusts the level of the signal input at each jack.
96
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
Switches the decoder activation mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for
DTS signals.
DECODER MODE
Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
96
STANDBY CHARGE
PARENTAL LOCK
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a
START PAIRING
Selects the video source played back in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
BGV
Selects the number of channels input from an external decoder.
INPUT CH
FRONT
Selects the analog jacks at which the front channel signals from an external decoder are input
when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”.
Option menu 5 OPTION MENU
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.
Adjusts the vertical position of the OSD.
Page
DIMMER
A)DISPLAY SET
98
OSD SHIFT
OSD-SOURCE
Sets the amount of time to display the HD Radio information (U.S.A.
model only), SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, XM Satellite Radio
information, or iPod menu in the video monitor after you perform a
certain operation.
Sets the amount of time to display the status information screen after
you perform a certain operation.
98
OSD-AMP
Selects the mode to display the information of the HD Radio
information (U.S.A. model only), SIRIUS Satellite Radio information,
XM Satellite Radio information, or iPod menu in the front panel
display.
FL SCROLL
Selects whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO,
S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO CONV.
HDMI RES.
B)VIDEO SET
Selects whether this unit activates the HDMI up-conversion of the
analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-scaled video signals are
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Adjusts the aspect ratio for analog video signals output at the HDMI
OUT jack.
99
HDMI ASPECT
84 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Page
—
Prevents accidental changes to sound field program parameter values
and other system settings.
C)MEMORY GUARD
Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input
sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the
power of this unit.
AUDIO SELECT
D)INIT. CONFIG
Designates the default decoder mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
100
100
DECODER MODE
EXTD SUR.
S.AUDIO
Designates the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
E)HDMI SET
Adjusts the maximum volume level in Zone 2.
MAX VOL.
F)ZONE2 SET
Sets the volume level of Zone 2 when you turn on the power of this
unit.
INIT. VOL.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 46).
85 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Using SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
8
Press k / n repeatedly and then press
4
8
ENTER to select and enter the desired
menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
3 SOUND MENU
R
• If you press PARAMETER during the “SET MENU”
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)LIPSYNC
operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.
9
• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
E)EXTD SUR.
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP
1
2
Up/Down
Enter
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
I
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
8
Press k / n repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
5
8
8
Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
submenu.
The following display is an example where “LFE
LEVEL” is selected.
SET MENU
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;SIGNAL INFO
.
B)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;-20dB
Up/Down
Enter
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
Up/Down
Adjust
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
8
3
Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
8
Press k / n to select the desired parameter
8
and then l / h to change the parameter
settings.
6
7
MANUAL SETUP
. 1 BASIC MENU
2 VOLUME MENU
3 SOUND MENU
4 INPUT MENU
5 OPTION MENU
8
• Press h to increase the value.
8
• Press l to decrease the value.
Up/Down
Enter
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
I
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET
MENU”.
86 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT
1 BASIC MENU
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker
settings. Most of the “BASIC MENU” parameters are set
automatically when you run the automatic setup.
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
A)SPEAKER SET
LFE/BASS OUT
1 BASIC MENU
. A)SPEAKER SET
B)SP LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)TEST TONE
SWFR FRONT >BOTH
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Enter
[ENTER]:
LFE signals output
Subwoofer(s) and speakers
Choice
y
Front
Other
Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL” and “SP DISTANCE”.
Subwoofer(s)
speakers
speakers
Output
Output
No output
No output
Output
No output
No output
No output
BOTH
SWFR
FRONT
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
y
8
To select the desired parameter, press k / n repeatedly.
No output
Extra speaker assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Low-frequency signals output
Subwoofer(s) and speakers
Choice
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
A)SPEAKER SET
X
Subwoofer(s)
X
EXTRA SP ASSIGN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ZONE2 >FRONT B
ZONE B PRESENCE
NONE
*1
*4
*2
*3
*1
*3
*3
*3
BOTH
SWFR
FRONT
*1
ZONE2 SET
XXXX[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/DownXXXXX
Not Available
XXXX[p]/[[]:EnterXXXXXXX
No output
X
Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front
channels and other speakers set to “SMALL”.
Always output the low-frequency signals of the front
channels.
Choice
ZONE2
Descriptions
*2
*3
*4
Select this setting when you use the Zone 2
speakers (see page 107).
Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set
to “LARGE”.
Select this setting when you use another front
FRONT B
ZONE B
Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to
“SMALL” or “NONE”.
Select this setting when you use another front
Select this setting when you use the presence
PRESENCE
NONE
Select this setting when you do not use the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Notes
• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP
• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 112), you cannot
select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.
• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out
87 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR. L/R SP
Front speakers FRONT SP
NONE >SMALL LARGE
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT SP
Choice
LARGE
Descriptions
Select this setting when the surround speakers
are large.
SMALL >LARGE
Select this setting when the surround speakers
are small.
SMALL
Choice
LARGE
Descriptions
Select this setting when you do not use the
surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual
L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.
NONE
Select this setting when the front speakers are
large.
Select this setting when the front speakers are
small.
SMALL
Surround back left/right speakers
SUR.B L/R SP
Note
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR.B L/R SP
When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select only
“LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to
other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the value to
“LARGE” automatically.
SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choice
LRGx1
Descriptions
A)SPEAKER SET
CENTER SP
Select this setting when the single surround back
speaker is large.
Select this setting when the surround back left
and right speakers are Large.
LRGx2
SMLx1
SMLx2
NONE
NONE >SMALL LARGE
Select this setting when the single surround back
speaker is small.
When the center speaker is large:
Select “LARGE” (large).
Select this setting when the surround back left
and right speakers are small.
When the center speaker is small:
Select “SMALL” (small).
Select this setting when you do not use the
surround back speakers. The surround back
channel signals are directed to the surround left
and right speakers.
When you do not use the center speaker:
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
Note
Choice
LARGE
Descriptions
If the Dolby TrueHD audio signals are input and “SUR.B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE”, the left and right surround back channels
are not directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Select this setting when the center speaker is
large.
Select this setting when the center speaker is
small.
SMALL
Select this setting when you do not use the center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed
to the front left and right speakers.
NONE
88 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Bass cross over CROSS OVER
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER
SET” (see page 87). All frequencies below the selected
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer(s) or front
speakers depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT”
in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87).
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting:
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB
CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR: –1.0 dB
A)SPEAKER SET
CROSS OVER
B)SP LEVEL
1/2
B)SP LEVEL
2/2
. FR.L
FR.R
CNTR
SUR.L
SUR.R
. SBL
SBR
SWFR
FREQ;;;;80Hz
y
SP LEVEL
FR.L
FR.R
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
Front right speaker
Center speaker
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
CNTR
SUR.L
SUR.R
SBL
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Subwoofer
A)SPEAKER SET
SUBWOOFER PHASE
SBR
SWFR
PR.L
>NORMAL REVERSE
Presence left speaker
Presence right speaker
PR.R
Choice
Functions
y
Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.
NORMAL
(normal)
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
• Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER LEVEL” setting (see page 90).
Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.
REVERSE
(reverse)
Notes
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R
89 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Notes
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B
■ Test tone D)TEST TONE
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER
SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.
C)SP DISTANCE
1/2
C)SP DISTANCE
2/2
D)TEST TONE
>OFF ON
. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet
FRONT L;;;10.0ft
FRONT R;;;10.0ft
CENTER;;;;;8.5ft
SUR. L;;;;;8.0ft
SUR. R;;;;;8.0ft
. SBL;;;;;;;;8.0ft
SBR;;;;;;;;8.0ft
SWFR;;;;;;;10.0ft
PRNS L;;;;;10.0ft
PRNS R;;;;;10.0ft
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Adjust
[p]/[[]:
Select
Return
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:
Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
Choice
OFF
Functions
This unit does not output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP
DISTANCE” settings.
Choice
meters (m)
feet (ft)
Functions
Adjusts speaker distances in meters.
Adjusts speaker distances in feet.
This unit outputs the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP
DISTANCE” settings.
ON
y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m
(10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
Note
This function is automatically turned off if you exit from “BASIC
MENU”.
SUR. L/SUR. R/SBL/SBR: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
SP DISTANCE
FRONT L
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
Center speaker
FRONT R
CENTER
SUR. L
SUR. R
SBL
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Subwoofer
SBR
SWFR
Presence left speaker
Presence right speaker
PRNS L
PRNS R
90 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP
effect level (see page 75) automatically in conjunction
with the volume level.
2 VOLUME MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume
settings.
Choice
AUTO
Functions
2 VOLUME MENU
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with
the volume level.
. ADAPTIVE DRC;;;;OFF
ADAPTIVE DSP
LEVEL;;;;OFF
Does not adjust the DSP effect level
automatically.
MUTE TYPE;;;;FULL
MAX VOL.;;;;+16.5dB
INIT. VOL.;;;;;;OFF
OFF
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
Note
Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this unit
does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP
LEVEL” (see page 75).
Adaptive dynamic range control
ADAPTIVE DRC
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in
conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful
when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When
“ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls
the dynamic range as follows:
Muting type MUTE TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
– If the VOLUME setting is low:
the dynamic range is narrow
– If the VOLUME setting is high:
Choice
FULL
–20dB
Functions
Mutes all the audio output.
the dynamic range is wide
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
AUTO
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected
loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume
range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX
VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes
–80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.
AUTO
OFF
OFF
Input level
Input level
VOLUME: low
VOLUME: high
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Choice
AUTO
OFF
Functions
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Notes
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX
VOL.” setting.
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and
“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of
this unit next time.
y
• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal
sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU”
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.
Note
• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE SET” to set the initial volume
level in Zone 2.
The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function
Initial volume INIT. VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Note
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting.
91 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Graphic equalizer GEQ
3 SOUND MENU
Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters.
Use this feature to match the tonal quality of the center,
surround L/R and surround back L/R, and surround back
speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. You can
adjust 7 frequency bands (63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz,
2.5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 16 kHz).
3 SOUND MENU
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)LIPSYNC
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
E)EXTD SUR.
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:Enter
A)EQUALIZER
2/2
A)EQUALIZER
1/2
TEST >OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
TEST >OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
.
.
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
0dB
0dB
0dB
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the
graphic equalizer.
Up/Down
Adjust
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.
y
8
8
Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust
the selected frequency band.
A)EQUALIZER
Note
EQ TYPE SELECT
AUTO PEQ >GEQ OFF
[NATURAL]
The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is
selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.
Select
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:Enter
Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while
Choice
Functions
8
listening to a test tone. To select “TEST”, press k / n
repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.
Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in
AUTO PEQ
A)EQUALIZER
1/2
Adjusts the built-in 7-frequency band graphic
equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speakers
GEQ
. TEST >OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
8
matches. Press ENTER to display the graphic
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
0dB
equalizer screen.
0dB
0dB
0dB
Deactivates the equalizing feature.
OFF
Up/Down
Select
y
under “AUTO PEQ”.
Choice
OFF
Functions
Does not output test tones and output the
currently selected source component.
Note
Outputs test tones from the selected speakers.
You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO
automatically selected as the default setting.
ON
92 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Low-frequency effect level
B)LFE LEVEL
■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding bitstream signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input
signal contains the LFE channel.
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
SPEAKER;;;;;;;;;MAX
. HEADPHONE;;;;;;;MAX
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
B)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
Speakers SPEAKER
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Adjust
[p]/[[]:
Headphones HEADPHONE
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the
headphones.
Speakers SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Choice
Functions
Headphones HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow
when this unit is decoding bitstream signals
(except Dolby TrueHD).
MIN/AUTO
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according
to the instruction of the input source signals
when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD
signals.
Note
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
jack.
Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When
this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the
dynamic range control is always active
regardless of the instruction of the input source
signals.
STD
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.
MAX
93 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Audio and video synchronization
(lip sync) D)LIPSYNC
Use this feature to adjust the audio and video
synchronization.
■ Extended surround E)EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the
connected surround back speakers.
D)LIPSYNC
E)EXTD SUR.
. HDMI AUTO;;;;;;OFF
AUTO;;;;;;;;;---ms
(offset;;;---ms)
. EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO
MANUAL;;;;;;;;;0ms
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
Select
Return
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:
HDMI automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO
If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic
audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip
sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Activates the optimum decoder to play back
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit
recognizes a signal flag being input.
synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate
or deactivate the automatic lip sync.
Choices: ON, OFF
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.
PLIIxMovie
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music
decoder.
If the connected video monitor is compatible
with the automatic lip sync:
Select “ON”. Use “AUTO” to make fine adjustments of
the audio and video synchronization.
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-
ES decoder.
EX/ES
OFF
If the video monitor is not compatible with the
automatic lip sync or you do not want to use
the automatic lip sync:
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
Select “OFF”. Use “MANUAL” to adjust the audio and
video synchronization.
Auto delay AUTO
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and
video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to
“ON”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
y
“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio
delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio
delay that you set in “AUTO”. This unit stores the value of
“offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync
compatible video monitors.
Manual delay MANUAL
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output
manually to synchronize audio with video images when
you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
94 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Input/output assignment
I/O ASSIGNMENT
4 INPUT MENU
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input
source.
4 INPUT MENU
1/2
4 INPUT MENU
2/2
. A) SIRIUS
. H) DTV/CBL
I) V-AUX
J) DOCK
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
B)
C)
D)
E)
XM
PHONO
TUNER
CD
R
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
K) BLUETOOTH
L)
M)
N) MULTI CH
Up/Down
DVR
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
F) MD/CD-R
G) DVD
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
VCR
Up/Down
Enter
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
Enter
[ENTER]:
[ENTER]:
L)
DVR
Input source
A)SIRIUS
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Parameter
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
PARENTAL LOCK
*
. COMPONENT IN;;;[B]
COAXIAL IN;;;;NONE
OPTICAL IN;;;;NONE
OPTICAL OUT;;;NONE
HDMI IN;;;;;;;;[3]
Current( DTV/CBL )
Select
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:Enter
B)XM
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
y
• “NONE” appears in the OSD when any input source is not
assigned to the input/output jack.
D)TUNER
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
• Set “OPTICAL OUT” to “(1)” for the digital recording
component that you connect to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the input/output jack
names that have been changed from their previous settings.
• The currently assigned input source for the selected input/
output jack appears in the OSD (“Current( DTV/CBL )” in the
display example above).
N)MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
BGV
INPUT CH
FRONT
C)PHONO
E)CD
F)MD/CD-R
G)DVD
I/O ASSIGNMENT
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
DECODER MODE
H)DTV/CBL
I)V-AUX
L)DVR
M)VCR
J)DOCK
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
STANDBY CHARGE
K)BLUETOOTH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
START PAIRING
Note
Some parameters described above may not be available for all
input sources and some parameters are only available for specific
input sources.
95 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Input rename INPUT RENAME
Decoder mode DECODER MODE
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
Use this feature to switch the decoder activation mode.
When you select “DTS” and digital audio signals are
input, this unit always activates the DTS decoder and only
plays back the DTS digital audio signals.
L)
DVR
INPUT RENAME
E)
CD
DVR .
DVR
I/O ASSIGNMENT
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
Position
[p]/[[]:
Character
[ ]/[ ]:
[ENTER]:Enter
Return
. DECODER MODE;;;AUTO
[RETURN]:
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
8
1
2
Press l / h to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Automatically detects digital audio signal input
types and selects the appropriate decoder.
8
Press k / n to select the character you
8
want to use and then press l / h to move
Activates the DTS decoder and plays back only
DTS digital audio signals when digital audio
signals are input.
DTS
to the next space.
Notes
Note
• You can use up to 9 characters for each input.
“DECODER MODE” is only available when the digital audio
input jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL, and/or COAXIAL) are assigned
to the selected input source.
8
• Press n to change the character in the following order,
8
or press k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock
PARENTAL LOCK
3
4
Repeat steps 1 through 2 to rename each
input source.
Use this feature to set the code number for locking the
desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting
the Parental Lock” on page 67 for details.
8
Press ENTER to complete.
Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode.
Volume trim VOL. TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the
level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in
volume when switching between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when
this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only
when this unit is turned on.
OFF
D)
TUNER
INPUT RENAME
. VOL. TRIM;;;;+6.0dB
Up/Down
Adjust
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio ZONE
OUT jacks.
96 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Start pairing START PAIRING
Choice
LAST
Functions
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with
your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing,
Automatically selects the last selected video
source as the background video source.
Selects the corresponding input source as the
background video source.
DVD, DTV/
CBL, DVR,
VCR, V-AUX
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
Does not play the video source in the
background.
OFF
Input channels INPUT CH
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
Choices: 6CH, 8CH
8
1
2
Press ENTER to start pairing.
The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching
Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the
video monitor.
N) MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
. INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH
Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter,
“YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the
Bluetooth device list.
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
If the connected component outputs discrete
6-channel audio signals.
Select “6CH”.
3
Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,
“Pairing completed” appears.
If the connected component outputs discrete
8-channel audio signals.
Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right
channel signals output from the connected component
are input.
y
9
To cancel the pairing, press RETURN to exit from
“START PAIRING”.
9
Press RETURN to exit from “START
4
Front left and right channels input jack FRONT
If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel
signals output from the connected external decoder is
input.
PAIRING”.
Notes
• If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth
components, “Not found” appears.
• If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No
Bluetooth Adapter” appears.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR,
V-AUX
N) MULTI CH
Multi-channel input BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;8CH
.
FRONT;;;;;;;;;;;DVD
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:Select
N) MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
. BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH
Note
“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to
“8CH”.
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:Select
97 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
status information screen after you perform a certain
operation.
5 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
Choice
Functions
5 OPTION MENU
. A)DISPLAY SET
B)VIDEO SET
Displays the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
ON
C)MEMORY GUARD
D)INIT. CONFIG
E)HDMI SET
F)ZONE2 SET
Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
10S
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Enter
[ENTER]:
Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
30S
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Note
Use this feature to set the mode to display the HD Radio
(U.S.A model only), XM Satellite Radio information,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, or iPod menu (such
as song title or channel name) in the front panel display.
Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set “OSD
SHIFT” to the factory presets (see page 112).
A)DISPLAY SET
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;;;0
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;+5
OSD-SOURCE;;;;;;30S
OSD-AMP;;;;;;;;;30S
FL SCROLL;;;;;;CONT
Choice
CONT
Functions
Continuous mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Adjust
[p]/[[]:
Scroll-once mode.
ONCE
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Control step: 1
■ Video settings B)VIDEO SET
Note
8
•
•
Press l to make the front panel display dimmer.
Press h to make the front panel display brighter.
Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
parameters in “VIDEO SET” to the factory presets (see
page 112).
8
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)
Control step: 1
B)VIDEO SET
. VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON
HDMI RES.;;;;*THRGH
Initial setting: 0
8
•
•
Press l to lower the position of the OSD.
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
8
Press h to raise the position of the OSD.
Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
HD Radio (U.S.A. model only), XM Satellite Radio, or
SIRIUS Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the
OSD after you perform a certain operation.
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks.
Choice
Functions
Choice
Functions
Displays the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
ON
Converts composite, S-video, and component
video signals interchangeably and up-converts
composite, S-video, and component video
signals to HDMI video signals.
ON
Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
10S
Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
30S
Does not convert any signals.
OFF
98 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
HDMI aspect ratio HDMI ASPECT
Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for
analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Notes
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
B)VIDEO SET
VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON
HDMI RES.;;;;*1080p
. HDMI ASPECT;;;THRGH
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted into component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
[p]/[[]:Up/Down
Select
[ENTER]:
Choice
THRGH
Functions
Does not make any adjustments to the aspect
ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.
Displays video images with the aspect ratio of
4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio
of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and left
sides as a result.
16:9
HDMI resolution HDMI RES.
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-
scaling of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S
VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-
scaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack.
This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:
Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to
your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9.
SMART
Notes
•
480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p,
or 1080p
• When “HDMI RES.” is set to “THROUGH”, you cannot make
any adjustments to “HDMI ASPECT”.
•
480p/576p → 1080i, 720p, or 1080p
• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this
unit automatically ignores the setting of “HDMI ASPECT”.
• When “HDMI ASPECT” is set to “SMART”, the video images
of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.
• When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the
signals are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, the
setting of “HDMI ASPECT” does not affect the video signals
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
B)VIDEO SET
HDMI RESOLUTION
>*THROUGH * 480p
* 720p
*1080p
*1080i
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:
Select
Enter
Choice
Functions
Does not up-scale any analog video signals.
THROUGH
Up-scales analog video signals to 480p or 576p,
1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution.
480p (or 576p),
1080i, 720p,
1080p
Notes
• This unit does not up-scale the analog component video signals
with 720p or 1080i of resolution.
• The “HDMI RES.” parameter appears only when you set
“VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
• If you connect your video monitor via HDMI connection, this
unit automatically detects the available video signal resolution
of the video monitor, and an asterisk (*) appears on the left of
the available video signal resolution(s).
• If this unit cannot detect the available video signal resolution(s)
of the connected video monitor, set “MON. CHK” (see
page 112) to “SKIP” and then set “HDMI RES.” again.
• This unit does not convert between 480 line video signals and
576 line video signals.
99 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Audio select AUDIO SELECT
■ Memory guard C)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound
field program parameter and other system settings.
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power
of this unit.
C)MEMORY GUARD
>OFF
ON
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Automatically detects the type of input signals
and selects the appropriate audio input jack
select setting.
[p]/[[]:Select
Return
[ENTER]:
Automatically selects the last input jack select
setting used for the connected input source.
LAST
Choice
OFF
Functions
Turns off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature.
Decoder mode DECODER MODE
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode
(see page 96) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
Protects:
ON
– sound field program parameters
– “AUTO SETUP” items
– all speaker levels
– “MANUAL SETUP” items
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Notes
Automatically detects the type of input signals
and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.
• You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to “ON”:
Automatically selects the last decoder mode
setting used for the connected input source.
LAST
– “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 94)
– “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” (see page 96)
– “PARENTAL LOCK” in “INPUT MENU” (see page 96)
– “MEMORY GUARD”
Extended surround EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode
(see page 94) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
• When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, “G ” appears at the
top right of the “SET MENU” screen.
• You can change the settings of “SUR.” in the sound field
program parameter screen (see page 79) even if “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to “ON”.
Choice
AUTO
Functions
■ Initial configuration D)INIT. CONFIG
Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input
jack select, active decoders and extended surround when
you turn on this unit.
Automatically detects the digital audio input
signals and activates the appropriate decoder.
LAST
Automatically selects the last decoder mode set
for “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU”.
D)INIT. CONFIG
. AUDIO SELECT;;AUTO
DECODER MODE;;AUTO
EXTD SUR.;;;;;AUTO
Select
Return
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:
100 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET
Use this feature to select the component to play back
HDMI audio signals.
■ Zone 2 settings F)ZONE2 SET
F)ZONE2 SET
. MAX VOL.;;;+16.5dB
INIT. VOL.;;;;;OFF
E)HDMI SET
S. AUDIO;;;;HTR-6180
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:Adjust
[p]/[[]:Select
Return
[ENTER]:
Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2.
Control range: –30.0dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Support audio S.AUDIO
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this
unit.
Notes
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting. For example, when “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and
then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of
this unit next time.
Choice
Functions
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The
HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input
jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on
the rear panel of this unit.
HTR-6180
• The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the
“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.
Plays back HDMI audio signals on another
HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT
jack.
Zone 2 Initial volume INI.VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the
power of this unit is turned on.
OTHER
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Notes
• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI
input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned
on even if “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”.
• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the
connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of
each connected component.
Notes
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting.
• When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS”, “Zone B”, or “NONE”
in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 87), “Zone 2 SP Not
Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET”
parameter is not available.
• The “INI.VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the
“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.
101 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Remote control features
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 104).
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your
F
F
unit.
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
4
4
4
4
DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one
4
set for DTV/CBL.
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
AV
AV
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
CD
A
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
CD
A
*3
DOCK
V-AUX
CBL
DTV
DOCK
V-AUX
CBL
DTV
*1
CD-R
PHONO
CD-R
PHONO
*1
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
AMP
AMP
SOURCE
TV
SOURCE
TV
Set to AMP
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
Set to TV
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN
9
AUDIO SEL
0
SLEEP
MULTI CH IN
9
AUDIO SEL
0
SLEEP
10
ENT
10
ENT
*2
*1
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
*2
LEVEL
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
LEVEL
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
A-E/CAT.
RETURN
DISPLAY
RETURN
DISPLAY
MEMORY
MEMORY
INFO
PRG SELECT
INFO
PRG SELECT
REC
REC
SCENE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Notes
Notes
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
Remote control
Digital TV/Cable TV
F
operation mode selector is set to AMP.
*3
4
A is the optional component control area button. You can
TV POWER
Turns the power on or off.
control the desired component without changing the input
source of this unit.
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV VOL +/–
TV CH +/–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
Changes the channel number.
Mutes the audio output.
Changes the input source.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
F
102 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
F
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
other components selected with the input selector buttons
1
2
3
4
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
[1]
4
(
5
6
7
8
). You must set the appropriate remote control code for
AV
[2]
[3]
MULTI CH IN
9
AUDIO SEL
0
SLEEP
10
ENT
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
CD
A
following table shows the function of each control button
used to control other components assigned to each input
[7]
[8]
DOCK
V-AUX
CBL
DTV
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
CD-R
PHONO
BAND
SRCH MODE
DVD
DVR
VCR
ENTER
[4]
[5]
[6]
AMP
A-E/CAT.
RETURN
DISPLAY
4
[9]
selector button ( ). Be advised that some buttons may not
SOURCE
TV
MEMORY
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
INFO
PRG SELECT
correctly operate the selected component.
REC
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
SCENE
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
y
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
The remote control has 12 modes (control areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 12
different components.
Remote
control
DVD player/
recorder
Digital TV/
Cable TV
MD/CD
recorder
VCR
LD player
CD player
Tuner
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*1
[1] AV POWER
[2] 1-9, 0, +10
[3] TITLE
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Preset stations
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons (1-8)/Numeric
buttons
Title
Band
[4] PRESET/CH
Preset up (1-8)/
Tuning up
Up
VCR channel up Up
VCR channel
k
Preset down
(1-8)/Tuning
down
PRESET/CH
n
Down
Down
down
Preset down
(A-E)
A-E/CAT. l Left
A-E/CAT. h Right
Left
Preset up
(A-E)
Right
ENTER
Enter
Enter
Hold
[5] RETURN
Return
Return
Memory
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
*2
[6] REC
Rec
Disc skip
Play
Rec
Rec
*2
p
Play
Play
Play
Play
Play
Search backward
*2
w/INFO Search backward Search backward
Search backward Search backward Search backward Information
*2
f
e
Search forward
Pause
Search forward
Pause
Search forward
Pause
Search forward
Pause
Search forward
Pause
Search forward
*2
Pause
Audio program
down
*2
b
a
Skip backward
Skip forward
Skip backward
Skip forward
Skip backward
Skip forward
Skip backward
Skip forward
Skip backward
Skip forward
Skip backward
Audio program
up
*2
Skip forward
*2
s
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
[7] ENT
Title/Index
Menu
Enter
Enter
Chapter/Time
Index
Index
Enter
[8] MENU
[9] DISPLAY
Menu
Display
Search mode
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2 These buttons operate your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 104).
103 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Setting remote control codes
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
4
)
1
2
Press one of the input selector buttons (
on the remote control to select the control
area you want to set up.
TUNER
SIRIUS
A
XM
CBL
DTV
DOCK
V-AUX
MD
CD
CD-R
Remote control code default settings
PHONO
DVD
DVR
VCR
Input
source
Component
category
Default
code
Manufacturer
TUNER
XM
TUNER
TUNER
TUNER
–
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
–
82915
82918
82176
–
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
a similar object.
SIRIUS
A
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the selected input selector button
lights up.
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
(iPod)
V-AUX
Yamaha
82981
TRANSMIT
DTV/CBL
CD
–
CD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
–
–
–
Flashes
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
–
62907
71292
42543
52544
–
DVD
MD/CD-R
DVD
Lights up
DVR
6
3
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) ( ) to
enter the five-digit remote control code for
the component to be used.
VCR
PHONO
–
–
–
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the remote control code for the
selected component is set.
Note
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,
try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
TRANSMIT
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
Flashes
9
0
y
Refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
Notes
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step
3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the
setup procedure.
• If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control
code previously set for the selected control area is cleared.
104 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Resetting all remote control codes
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
a similar object.
1
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
Flashes
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “9981”.
2
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and all the remote control codes
previously set are cleared and reset to the initial
factory settings.
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
TRANSMIT
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
Flashes
9
0
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 1, the
clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing
procedure.
105 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connecting Zone 2
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
•
•
An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.
An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
•
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to
use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
OUT
OUT
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha
component
Yamaha
component
This unit
■ Using the external amplifier
Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows.
From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks
Amplifier
Main zone
Second zone
(Zone 2)
Infrared signal receiver
Remote control
DVD player (etc.)
This unit
Infrared signal emitter
From the REMOTE IN jack
From the REMOTE OUT jack
Note
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
106 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Important safety notice
The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to
“ZONE2” (see page 87).
FRONT B/ZONE2/
PRESENCE
R
EXTRA SP
L
Second zone
(Zone 2)
This unit
Main zone
y
• You can use the speakers connected EXTRA SP speaker terminals as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP
ASSIGN” to “ZONE B” (see page 87).
• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and
Controlling Zone 2
You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are as follows:
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel
Turning on Zone 2
•
•
Selecting the input source of Zone 2.
H
Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2.
Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected
Canada models only).
•
•
•
Activating the Zone 2 operation mode
I
Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for
approximately 10 seconds.
Tuning into SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is
selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 64)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only).
Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source
ZONE2
Flashes
Note
You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is
flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is
automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal
operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection
procedure.
107 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2
operation mode.
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “9992”.
2
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
Operating Zone 2
1
2
3
4
R
Rotate the INPUT selector to select the
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
TRANSMIT
5
6
7
8
desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator
is flashing in the front panel display.
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
Flashes
9
0
•
Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER
features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER
Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM
Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the
XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM Satellite
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote
•
control
Turning on Zone 2
D
C
Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and
•
•
Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations, see “SIRIUS
Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod
features or Bluetooth features in Zone 2. For details
about the iPod operations, see “Using iPod™” on
4
then press
to set the remote control to the
Zone 2 mode.
D
• Press POWER when the main zone is turned on.
• Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off.
C
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control lights
up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode.
POWER
While holding
down
Set Zone 2 to the standby mode
TRANSMIT
PHONO
or
H
Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the
standby mode.
STANDBY
Lights up
y
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to set the main zone and Zone 2 to the
Notes
standby mode simultaneously.
• When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode,
■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2
mode
The remote control is originally set to the main mode to
control the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote
control, you must first set the remote control to the Zone 2
mode.
D
C
E
G
POWER, STANDBY, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, and
the input selector buttons (4) are set to control Zone 2.
However, the rest of the remote control buttons remain in the
main mode.
• The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in
the following cases:
– when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after
the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode.
– when you press a remote control button other than
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
a similar object.
1
D
C
E
G
POWER, STANDBY, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, the
B
A
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
SCENE buttons and the input selector buttons (4).
flashes twice.
Activating the Zone 2 operation mode
D
Press POWER to turn on Zone 2.
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
Flashes
Operating Zone 2
4
Press one of the input selector buttons ( ) to
select the desired input source of Zone 2.
Setting Zone 2 to the standby mode
C
Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby
mode.
108 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SETUP
Advanced setup
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
K
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn on this unit (see page 29).
K
L
M
N
• Only MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, SYSTEM OFF, TONE CONTROL and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you
are using the advanced setup menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Using the advanced setup
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6ΩMIN
L
Press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to
1
2
•
•
Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.
Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω.
set this unit to the standby mode.
M
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and
K
then press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
SP IMP.
Speaker
Impedance level
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Front
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ω or
While holding
down
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
TONE CONTROL
8ΩMIN
*
higher.
Center
Surround
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
N
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
Surround back
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
SPꢀIMP.-8ꢀMIN
Front
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Currently selected
parameter
Currently selected
parameter setting
6ΩMIN
M
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to
Center
Surround
4
5
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
change the selected parameter setting.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to save the new
setting and set this unit to the standby mode.
Surround back
*
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
109 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TU
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition.
See page 109 for the operation of the advanced setup.
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition. This feature is useful when you
operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/
amplifiers in the same room separately.
Choices: ID1, ID2
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID code
is set to “82915”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID code
is set to “82178”.
Choices: ID1, ID2
Setting remote control TUNER ID codes
You need to set the remote control TUNER ID library
code for the remote control.
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is
set to “00001”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is
set to “00002”.
4
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the
1
Setting remote control AMP ID codes
You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the
remote control.
input source.
TUNER
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
a similar object.
1
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
a similar object.
2
flashes twice.
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
Flashes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
Flashes
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “00001” or “00002”.
2
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the AMP ID code is changed.
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “82915” or “82178”.
3
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
flashes twice, and the TUNER ID code is changed.
1
2
3
7
4
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
TRANSMIT
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
8
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
TRANSMIT
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
Flashes
5
6
8
9
0
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
9
0
Flashes
Remote
control AMP
ID *2
AMP ID
code *1
Function
To operate this unit using
Remote
control
TUNER ID *2
TUNER ID
code *1
Function
00001
ID1
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
(initial setting)
82915
To operate this unit using
ID1
(initial setting)
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
00002
ID2
82178
ID2
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
110 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
■ Remote control SIRIUS ID REMOTE SR
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the SIRIUS ID of this unit for
remote control recognition.
See page 109 for the operation of the advanced setup.
■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote
control recognition.
Choices: ID1, ID2
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control SIRIUS ID code
is set to “82176”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control SIRIUS ID code
is set to “82177”.
Choices: ID1, ID2
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID code is
set to “82918”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID code is
set to “82179”.
Setting remote control SIRIUS ID codes
You need to set the remote control SIRIUS ID code for the
remote control.
Setting remote control XM ID codes
You need to set the remote control XM ID code for the
remote control.
4
Press TUNER to select “SIRIUS” as the
input source.
1
4
Press XM to select “XM” as the input
source.
1
SIRIUS
XM
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
a similar object.
2
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
a similar object.
2
flashes twice.
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
Flashes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
Flashes
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “82176” or “82177”.
3
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the SIRIUS ID code is changed.
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “82918” or “82179”.
B
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
3
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
flashes twice, and the XM ID code is changed.
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
TRANSMIT
5
6
7
8
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
9
0
Flashes
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
TRANSMIT
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
9
0
Flashes
Remote
control
SIRIUS ID *2
SIRIUS ID
code *1
Function
To operate this unit using
Remote
control XM
ID *2
82176
ID1
XM ID code
*1
Function
To operate this unit using
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
(initial setting)
82177
ID2
82918
ID1
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
(initial setting)
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
82179
ID2
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
111 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
■ Monitor check MON.CHK
See page 109 for the operation of the advanced setup.
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check
function of this unit. When “MON. CHK” is set to “YES”,
this unit receives the information of the available video
signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via
HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported
by the video monitor in “HDMI RES.” (see page 99).
When “MON. CHK” is set to “SKIP”, you can select any
resolution in “HDMI RES.”.
■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock
personal identification number reset
SR PIN
Use this feature to set the code number (personal
identification number) for the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Parental Lock feature to the initial factory setting. This
feature is useful when you forget or want to change the
current code number.
Choices: YES, SKIP
■ Parameter initialization INIT
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the
initial factory settings. You can select the category of
parameters to be initialized.
Choices: RESET, CANCEL
•
Select “RESET” to set the code number to the initial
factory setting.
•
Select “CANCEL” to set the code number to the initial
factory setting.
Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL
•
•
Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters
Select “VIDEO” to initialize the parameters in
“VIDEO SET” (see page 98) and “OSD SHIFT” in
“DISPLAY SET” (see page 98).
Note
Even if you set “SR PIN” to “RESET”, this unit does not unlock
the locked channels. The initial factory setting of the Parental
Lock code number is “0000”.
•
•
Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this
unit.
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization
procedure.
■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier
Choices: ON, OFF
Note
•
Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier
function. “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE”
automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel
audio signals at the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
speaker terminals.
Use “INITIALIZE” in the sound field program menu to initialize
•
Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier
function.
Note
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, you can only select “FRONT
B”, “ZONE B”, or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see
page 87).
■ SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR
Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the
REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the
SCENE mode.
Choices: ON, OFF
•
Select “ON” when the component connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has
the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit
automatically sends the remote control signals to the
component.
•
Select “OFF” when the component connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and
does not have the capability of the SCENE control
signals.
Note
If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set
“SCENE IR” to “OFF”.
112 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wires
for each connection do not touch anything other than
their respective connections.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning or cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use this
strong static electricity). unit normally.
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power
—
No sound.
Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
The optimizer microphone is connected.
Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while playing a source
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control).
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
The front speakers to be used have not been
selected properly.
A
Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS
on the front panel repeatedly.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Turn up the volume.
—
G
E
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output and then adjust the
volume.
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component, such unit.
as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
“S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and
“HDMI” audio signals are not being played SETUP”.
back on this unit.
Set “S.AUDIO” to “HTR-6180” in “MANUAL
No picture.
The output and input for the picture are
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source
connected to different types of video jacks. components in the same way as you connect your
video monitor to this unit.
Non-standard video signals are input.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
—
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned this unit off.
The sound is muted.
Turn this unit on, and play the source again.
—
G
E
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output.
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.
113 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
sound field program, the source signal is
directed to the center channel, and the front
and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”.
Try another sound field program.
One of the sound field programs (except
for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected.
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off.
O
Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “PRESENCE”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
“NONE”.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and
a monaural source is being played back.
O
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting
“NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
other than “NONE”.
“SUR.B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.
“NONE”.
Zone 2 speaker
settings are not
available in “SET
MENU”.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “ZONE2”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE2”.
FRONT B speakers
cannot be activated.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “FRONT B”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.
No sound from the
center, surround or
surround back
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to
“ZONE B”.
speakers when the
FRONT B speakers are
activated.
Presence speaker
settings are not
available in “SET
MENU”.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “PRESENCE”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a
2-channel source is being played.
The source does not contain low-frequency
signals.
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in the
front panel display
does not light up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-
head amplifier.
114 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effects
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effects
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
—
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
INPUT jacks.
Some components cannot record Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
(U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio signals are not output at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
Connect the recording component to the analog
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
A source cannot be
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
recorded by an analog the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
IN jacks.
component connected
to the AUDIO OUT
(REC) jacks.
XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite
Radio signals are not output at the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks.
The sound field
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
—
parameters and some set to “ON”.
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
No sound is heard
from the connected
HDMI component.
The HDMI component does not accept the Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the
—
—
multi-channel audio signals.
2-channel audio signals at the source component such
as a DVD player.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
This unit is too close to the digital or high- Move this unit further away from such equipment.
frequency equipment.
frequency equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature is too high and the Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
—
overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
turn it back on.
■ HDMI
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
No picture or sound.
—
HDCP authentication failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
115 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ Tuner (FM/AM)
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
—
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot be
obtained even with a
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-
path interference.
FM
good FM antenna.
The desired station
cannot be tuned into with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
Previously preset
stations can no longer be long period.
tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
Preset the stations again.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into with connections are loose.
the automatic tuning
The signal is weak or the antenna
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and
orient the antenna for the best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
method.
AM There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noise can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
■ HD Radio (U.S.A. model only)
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
This unit cannot
The radio station provides analog FM/AM Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio
receive the HD Radio
signals of the selected
radio station.
radio service only.
service.
Tuning mode is set to “MANUAL
TUNING.
Set the tuning mode to “AUTO TUNING”.
The signal is too weak.
Adjust the antenna position.
—
—
Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna.
This unit cannot select The radio station provides an audio
other audio programs program only.
than the main
Select an FM HD Radio station that provides multiple
audio programs.
program.
HD Radio information The radio station does not provide the
Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio
information.
does not appear.
information.
116 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ XM Satellite Radio
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock
CHECK XM TUNER
XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-
Tuner dock is not connected to this unit.
and check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is connected
to this unit.
The XM antenna is not connected to the
XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM antenna the XM Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable
cable has become damaged.
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to
CHECK ANTENNA
LOADING
for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is
damaged.
The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or This message should disappear in a few seconds in
program information from the XM satellite good signal conditions. If you see this message often,
signal. This message can also occur in
reposition the XM antenna to get better signal
weak XM signal conditions. Note that this reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in
unit may not respond to some operations
while this message is displayed.
the front panel or “XM Information” screen in the
video monitor to check the antenna reception level.
The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the
XM satellite signal. Something may be
blocking the XM antenna’s view of the
satellites or the antenna is not properly
aimed.
Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM
antenna to get better signal reception. Use the
“ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or
“XM Information” screen in the video monitor to
check the antenna reception level. See instructions
supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for
antenna installation information.
NO SIGNAL
The XM channel you selected is not
currently broadcasting.
Check back at a later time; in the mean time, select
another channel.
—
OFF AIR
You may be attempting to tune to an XM
channel that is blocked or that you cannot http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and
Consult the latest channel guide at
CH UNAUTH
receive with your XM subscription
package.
http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the
current list of channels. For information on receiving
this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US
residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian
residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at
1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677
(Canadian residents).
The selected channel is not available. The Consult the latest channel guide at
—
—
CH UNAVAIL
channel may have been reassigned to a
different channel number. This message
may occur initially with a new XM Mini-
Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not
received XM’s signal for an extended
period.
http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and
http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the
current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-
Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received
XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM
Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at
least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.
No artist name or song title is available for No action required.
this selection.
- - - -
117 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
The antenna is not connected to the
SiriusConnect tuner properly.
Check the connection of the antenna and
SiriusConnect tuner.
ANTENNA ERROR
The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.
Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and
this unit.
CHECK SR TUNER
The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the AC wall outlet.
Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to
the AC wall outlet.
This unit does not support the connected
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit
supports,
NOT SUPPORTED
ACQUIRING
The signal is too weak.
Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the
SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”
information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS
Information” screen in the video monitor to check the
antenna reception level.
The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
channel list.
Wait until the updating is complete.
—
—
UPDATING
The period of the subscription is end.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the
subscription.
The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
firmware.
Wait until the updating is complete.
F/W UPDATING
The selected channel is not subscribed.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the
selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
CALL SIRIUS
(CALL 888-539-
SIRIUS TO
SUBSCRIBE)
Select another channel.
The subscription information is updated.
SUB UPDATED
INVALID
The selected channel is currently out of
service.
Select another channel.
The operation you made is not available.
Not Available
■ Remote control
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter Reposition this unit.
type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking
—
the remote control sensor of this unit.
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
—
—
The operation mode selector is set
incorrectly.
Set the operation mode selector correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
F
When operating the component selected by the input
F
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
4
When operating the TV set in the DTV or
4
F
PHONO area, set it to the TV position.
The remote control code was not correctly Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
set.
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
The ID code of the remote control and the Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
remote control ID of this unit do not match. corresponding remote control ID code.
118 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
This unit is in the middle of recognizing the
connection with your iPod.
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of acquiring song
lists from your iPod.
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
Connect error
Try resetting your iPod.
—
—
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
Unknown iPod
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-
10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this unit
is complete.
iPod connected
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
Disconnected
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are
playable.
—
—
Unable to play
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
■ Bluetooth
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of the pairing.
Searching...
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of establishing
the connection.
The paring is completed.
The paring is canceled.
Completed
Canceled
The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) and the Bluetooth component is
established.
BT connected
The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such
as YBA-10, sold separately).
Disconnected
No BT adapter
The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-
the DOCK terminal. 10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal.
119 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
See
page
Error message
Cause
Remedy
Optimizer microphone is not connected.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
Connect MIC!
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
—
Unplug HP!
The parameters of this unit are protected.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
Memory Guard!
During AUTO SETUP
See
page
Error message
Cause
Remedy
Front L/R channel signals are not detected.
A surround channel signal is not detected.
A presence channel signal is not detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
Check the surround speaker connections.
Check the presence speaker connections.
E-1:NO FRONT SP
E-2:NO SUR SP
E-3:NO PRNS SP
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only a right surround back channel signal is Connect the surround back speaker to the
detected.
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS
terminal if you only have one surround back
speaker.
Background noise is too loud.
Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet
environment.
—
—
E-5:NOISY
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
E-6:CHECK SUR.
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting.
E-8:NO SIGNAL
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
E-9:USER CANCEL
An internal error occurred.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR
120 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
After AUTO SETUP
See
page
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message Check the speaker connections for proper
may appear depending on the speakers even polarity (+ or –).
when the speakers are connected correctly.
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
—
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
Check the speaker connections.
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
When “SWFR: TOO LOUD”or “SWFR:
TOO LOW” appears in the result screen, the
output volume of the subwoofer.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to
“PRESENCE”, though the presence channel
signals are not detected.
Check the presence speaker connections.
W-4:CHECK PRNS
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to a setting other
than “PRESENCE”.
Notes
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.
• If a warning message “W-1”, “W-2”, or “W-3” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If an error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
121 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
L
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to
1
2
set this unit to the standby mode.
M
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and
K
then press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
While holding
down
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
TONE CONTROL
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select
3
4
“INIT”.
M
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to
select “ALL”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
5
122 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
Glossary
■ Audio and video synchronization
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front
channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,
Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an
additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low
Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum
volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
(lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical
term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining
audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and
transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires
complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an
automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices
to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately
without user interaction.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter
section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a
restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each
amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely
to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass
filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a
cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.
Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from
5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that
derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
“fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is
separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR
signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more
faithfully with this system because each of these signals is
independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted
from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is
required in order to output component signals.
■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed
for high-definition programming and media including HD
broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory
audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for
Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with
discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,
Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for
the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby
Digital.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is
composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,
brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a
video component transmits these three elements combined.
■ Deep Color
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,
up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI
specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other
displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and
eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions
and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio
can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new
technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left
and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right
channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro
Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and
“Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-
channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There
are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)
and “Game mode” for game sources.
123 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ Dolby Surround
■ DTS Express
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to
reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and
right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),
and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The
surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency
range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The
Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume
on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and
directionality.
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional
feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,
low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet
applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio
feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.
These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the
additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on
demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are
mixed down with the main audio stream on the player
component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to
the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or
analog connections.
■ Dolby TrueHD
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the
studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up
to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby
Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media
including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional
audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps
for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up
to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■ DSD
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,
signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency
sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and
oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence
with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that
offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to
18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,
DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of
24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version
1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/
amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for
multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-
compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz
sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”
refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality
transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel
sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a
set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a
digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-
definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a
single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video
interface that meets the security requirements of content
providers and system operators. For further information on
HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and
is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the
world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you
can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front
left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1
(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit
incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing
5.1-channel format.
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
124 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ LFE 0.1 channel
■ “x.v.Color”
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency
range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range
compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels
in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a
more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression
of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining
compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”
expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural
images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer
graphics.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the
full-range channels with higher separation just like digital
discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround
technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for
digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in
surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic
frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more
detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and
localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from
5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio
signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any
compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and
DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the
size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for
“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses
and then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,
while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into
a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range
of rates that can be played back is determined based on the
sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound
level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In
principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range
of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II)
SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II) is a high-performance
6.1 channel matrix surround sound decoding system. It is the
next-generation of the original SRS Circle Surround technology,
incorporating powerful industry-first features including the dialog
clarity enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to
the front channels and subwoofer.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y
signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance
through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates
video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback
of even more beautiful images.
125 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
Sound field program information
■ Elements of a sound field
■ SILENT CINEMA
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that
does not include a center speaker.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit
enhances your listening experience by regenerating the
missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency
fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-
frequency bass is compensated, providing improved
performance of the overall sound system.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field
processor.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound
field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
126 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
• Volume Control ...................................... MUTE/–80 dB to 16.5 dB
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... 10 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. 10 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 120 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R, 8/6/4/2 Ω ...................................... 140/175/205/250 W
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F.
• Maximum Output Power [Russia model]
Speaker impedance setting: 8 Ω, 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω
.......................................................................................... 155 W
(FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR.B L/R SP:
SMALL/SML) ............................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω .................................................................................... 1.25 dB
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format (Gray Back)
• IEC Output Power [Russia model]
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ................................... 115 W
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... NTSC
[Russia model] ....................................................................... PAL
• Damping Factor (IHF)
Front L/R, SPEAKERS A, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω
................................................................................. 120 or more
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
• Signal Level
PHONO (MM)........................................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Voltage
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
PHONO (MM)
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
1 kHz, 0.1% THD .............................................. 60 mV or more
CD, etc.
Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD .............................. 2.3 V or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio
.................................................................................... 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
Component (Video Conversion Off)
.............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, –3 dB
OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, FRONT SP: SMALL)
................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Russia model] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
• Frequency Response
1 kHz, 100% MOD., Mono ............................... 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)
CD to Front L/R, 10 Hz to 100 kHz
...................................................................................... +0/–3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB
HD Radio (U.S.A. model) .................................................... 80 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (MM) .............................................................. 0 0.5 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
• Total Harmonic Distortion
Mono/Stereo .......................................................................... 0.5%
HD Radio (U.S.A. model) ................................................... 0.03%
PHONO (MM) to OUT (REC)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V ............................................ 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
2ch Stereo, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω .............. 0.06% or less
AM SECTION
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
• Tuning Range
PHONO (MM, 5 mV) to OUT (REC)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Russia model] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
[Russia model] ....................................................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (Effect Off, 250 mV) to Front L/R
........................................................................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
127 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Russia model] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 400 W/500 VA
[Russia model] ................................................................... 440 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.8 W or less
[Russia model] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A., Canada, and China models]
.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Russia model] ..................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 393 mm
(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 15-1/2 in)
• Weight ............................................................. 11.9 kg (26 lbs 4 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
128 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Index
AUTO SETUP, Troubleshooting .......120
AUTO, Lip sync ...................................94
Automatic tuning mode,
FM/AM tuning .................................53
Available decoders with Sound field
programs ..........................................79
Charge on standby, Input menu ........... 96
CHECK ANTENNA, XM Satellite Radio
CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup warning
CHECK SR TUNER, SIRIUS Satellite
Radio status message ..................... 118
CHECK SUR., Automatic setup error
CHECK XM TUNER, XM Satellite Radio
CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 31
CLASSICAL,
■
Numerics
2ch STEREO,
7ch Enhancer,
7ch STEREO,
■
B
B)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu ...............93
B)SP LEVEL, Basic menu ...................89
BASIC MENU, Manual setup ..............87
Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio
operation ..........................................65
Bass cross over, Speaker settings .........89
BGV, Input menu .................................97
Bluetooth adapter connection ...............25
Bluetooth component playback ............72
Bluetooth component use .....................72
Bluetooth, Troubleshooting ................119
BT connected,
Sound field category ........................ 48
Completed, Bluetooth
■
A
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .............. 17
Connect error, iPod status message ... 119
Connect MIC!, Automatic setup
ACQUIRING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Action Game,
ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL,
Adaptive dynamic range control,
All Channel Search mode,
error message ................................. 120
Connection, AM antenna
Connection, Bluetooth adapter ............ 25
Connection, CD player ........................ 23
Connection,
CENTER PRE OUT jack ................ 24
Connection, DVD player ..................... 21
Connection, DVD recorder .................. 22
Connection,
FRONT PRE OUT jacks ................. 24
Connection, iPod universal dock ......... 25
Connection, Multi-format player ......... 25
Connection, Power cable ..................... 28
Connection, PVR ................................. 22
Connection,
■
C
C)DYNAMIC RANGE,
C)MEMORY GUARD,
Option menu ...................................100
C)SP DISTANCE, Basic menu ............90
Cable plugs ...........................................17
CALL SIRIUS,
All remote control codes
SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Amplifier function OSD display time,
ANTENNA ERROR, SIRIUS Satellite
Audio and video synchronization,
AUDIO SELECT, Initial
status message ................................118
CAT SEARCH, SIRIUS tuning ...........66
Category Search mode,
SIRIUS tuning ..................................66
CD player connection ...........................23
Cellar Club, Sound field program ........49
CENTER PRE OUT jack
connection ........................................24
CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............88
Center speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................79
Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........88
CENTER WIDTH,
SiriusConnect tuner ......................... 64
Connection, speaker cable ................... 16
Connection,
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ....... 24
Connection,
Connection,
Connection, TV monitor ...................... 20
Connection,
XM Mini-Tuner Dock ..................... 59
CSII Cinema, Decoder type ................. 80
CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 79
Decoder parameter ...........................81
CH UNAUTH, XM Satellite Radio
status message ................................117
CH UNAVAIL, XM Satellite Radio
status message ................................117
Chamber, Sound field program ............48
Audio select,
129 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
E-7:NO MIC, Automatic setup error
message ..........................................120
E-8:NO SIGNAL, Automatic setup error
message ..........................................120
E-9:USER CANCEL, Automatic setup
EFFECT LEVEL,
Sound field parameter ......................79
ENHANCER indicator .........................30
ENTERTAINMENT,
EQ, Auto setup parameter ....................33
Equalizer type select, Equalizer ...........92
Extended surround,
External amplifier connection ..............24
External decoder connection ................25
EXTRA SP ASSIGN, Auto setup
parameter .........................................33
EXTRA SP ASSIGN,
HDMI aspect ratio ............................... 99
HDMI auto, Lip sync ........................... 94
HDMI RES., Video settings ................ 99
HDMI set, Option menu .................... 101
HEADPHONE, Dynamic range .......... 93
HEADPHONE,
Low frequency effect level .............. 93
Headphones indicator .......................... 30
Headphones, Dynamic range ............... 93
Headphones,
■
D
Decoder descriptions ............................ 80
DECODER MODE,
Decoder mode,
Decoder mode, Input menu .................. 96
Decoder selection ................................. 79
DEVICE OVER,
DIALG.LIFT,
Sound field parameter ...................... 75
Dialogue lift,
Sound field parameter ...................... 75
Direct number access mode,
Direct number access mode,
Disconnected,
Low frequency effect level .............. 93
■
I
I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ......... 95
INI.VOL., Zone 2 settings ................. 101
INIT.DLY,
INIT.VOL., Volume menu .................. 91
Initial configuration,
Extra speaker assignment,
Auto setup parameter .......................33
Extra speaker assignment,
Option menu .................................. 100
Initial delay,
■
F
INTERNAL ERROR, Automatic setup
Initial volume, Volume menu .............. 91
Input channel and speaker
indicators ......................................... 31
INPUT MENU, Manual setup ............. 95
Input menu, Manual setup ................... 84
INPUT RENAME, Input menu ........... 96
Input source information display ......... 46
Input/output assignment,
Bluetooth status message ............... 119
Disconnected,
F/W UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
status message ................................118
FL SCROLL, Display settings .............98
FM antenna connection ........................27
FM tuning .............................................53
FOCUS .................................................81
Front panel display ...............................30
Front panel display scroll,
Display settings, Option menu ............. 98
Displaying HD Radio information ....... 58
DSP effect sound level,
Sound field parameter ...................... 75
DSP LEVEL,
Display settings ................................98
FRONT PRE OUT jack
Sound field parameter ...................... 75
DVD recorder connection .................... 22
Dynamic range, Sound menu ............... 93
connection ........................................24
FRONT SP, Speaker settings ...............88
INVALID, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
iPod universal dock connection ........... 25
■
E
E)EXTD SUR., Sound menu ............... 94
E)HDMI SET, Option menu .............. 101
E-1:NO FRONT SP, Automatic setup
error message ................................. 120
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR, Automatic
E-2:NO SUR SP, Automatic setup
error message ................................. 120
E-3:NO PRNS SP, Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 120
E-4:SBR->SBL, Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 120
E-5:NOISY, Automatic setup error
■
G
Graphic equalizer, Equalizer ................92
■
H
■
J
Hall in Munich,
Hall in Vienna,
HD Radio information display .............58
HD Radio, Troubleshooting ...............116
HDCP ERROR,
■
L
LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup
warning message ........................... 121
LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ........... 87
message .......................................... 120
E-6:CHECK SUR., Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 120
130 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
LIVE/CLUB,
NO SUR SP, Automatic setup
NOISY, Automatic setup
Not Available, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
status message ................................118
NOT SUPPORTED, SIRIUS Satellite
Number of speakers,
Presence sound field initial delay, Sound
field parameter ................................. 76
Presence sound field room size, Sound
field parameter ................................. 77
Presence speaker indicators ................. 31
Presence speaker using ........................ 13
Preset channel setting,
Preset Search mode,
LOADING, XM Satellite Radio status
Low-frequency effect level,
SIRIUS tuning ................................. 66
Preset Search mode, XM tuning .......... 61
PRESET SEARCH, SIRIUS tuning .... 66
Preset tuning mode,
Pro Logic, Decoder type ...................... 80
Projector connection ............................ 20
Pure Direct ........................................... 52
PVR connection ................................... 22
■
M
■
O
Manual tuning mode,
Memory Guard!, Automatic setup
OFF AIR, XM Satellite Radio status
message ..........................................117
OPTION MENU, Manual setup ...........98
Option menu, Manual setup .................84
OSD SHIFT, Display settings ..............98
OSD shift, Display settings ..................98
OSD-SOURCE, Display settings .........98
Other components controlling
■
R
MULTI CH INPUT component
Multi-channel input BGV, Input menu,
Multi-channel source playback
MUSIC ENHANCER,
Other components controlling,
Remote control ...............................103
OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup
warning message ............................121
OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup
warning message ............................121
Rear panel ............................................ 10
Remote control AMP ID,
Remote control code
default settings ............................... 104
Remote control codes setting ............. 104
Remote control SIRIUS ID,
Remote control TUNER ID,
■
P
P.INIT.DLY,
Sound field parameter ......................76
P.ROOM SIZE,
Sound field parameter ......................77
Parameter initialization,
Advanced setup ..............................112
Parametric equalizer type,
Auto setup parameter .......................33
PARENTAL LOCK, Input menu .........68
PHONES jack .......................................45
PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......79
Playing video sources
in the background .............................45
PLII Music, Decoder type ....................80
PLIIx Music, Decoder type ..................80
Power cable connection ........................28
PR LEVEL,
Remote control XM ID,
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 26
REMOTE TU, Advanced setup ......... 110
REMOTE XM, Advanced setup ........ 111
Rename, SCENE template ................... 40
Resetting the system .......................... 122
REV.DELAY,
REV.LEVEL,
REV.TIME,
Reverberation delay,
Reverberation level,
Reverberation time,
Roleplaying Game,
Sound field program ........................ 49
ROOM SIZE,
Room size,
Music Video,
■
N
No BT Adapter, Bluetooth status
NO FRONT SP, Automatic setup
NO MIC, Automatic setup
NO PRNS SP, Automatic setup
NO SIGNAL, Automatic setup
NO SIGNAL, XM Satellite Radio
Sound field parameter ......................79
Presence left speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................79
Presence right speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................79
131 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Sound field programs
Sound field programs
Surround back sound field liveness,
Surround back sound field room size,
Surround back speaker level,
Surround decode mode ........................ 79
Surround left speaker level,
Surround left/right speakers,
Speaker settings ............................... 88
SURROUND PRE OUT jack
Surround right speaker level,
Surround sound field initial delay,
Surround sound field liveness,
Surround sound field room size,
SYSTEM OFF ..................................... 29
■
S
S VIDEO jacks ..................................... 17
S.INIT.DLY,
Sound field parameter ...................... 76
S.LIVENESS,
Sound field parameter ...................... 77
S.ROOM SIZE,
Sound field parameter ...................... 77
SB INI.DLY,
Sound field parameter ...................... 76
SB LEVEL,
Sound field parameter ...................... 79
SB LIVENESS,
Sound field parameter ...................... 77
SB ROOM SIZE,
Sound field parameter ...................... 77
SBR->SBL, Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 120
SCENE 1 ................................................ 8
SCENE 2 ................................................ 8
SCENE 3 ................................................ 8
SCENE 4 ................................................ 8
SCENE IR code setting,
Sci-Fi, Sound field program ................. 49
Searching...,
Bluetooth status message ............... 119
Selecting
HD Radio audio programs ............... 57
Selection,
Shuffle, iPod playback ......................... 71
SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 31
SIRIUS Parental Lock personal
Sound menu, Manual setup ..................83
Source feature OSD display time,
Display settings ................................98
SP A B indicators .................................31
SP, Auto setup result ............................34
Speaker cable connection .....................16
Speaker distance,
Auto setup result ..............................34
Speaker distance,
Basic menu .......................................90
Speaker impedance setting ...................28
Speaker impedance,
Advanced setup ..............................109
Speaker level, Auto setup result ...........34
Speaker settings, Basic menu ...............87
SPEAKER,
Speakers, Dynamic range .....................93
Speakers,
Specifications .....................................127
SR LEVEL,
Sound field parameter ......................79
SR PIN, Advanced setup ....................112
STANDBY CHARGE,
Standby mode, Main zone ....................29
Straight .................................................51
Straight Enhancer,
STRAIGHT mode ................................51
SUB UPDATED, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
status message ................................118
SUBWOOFER PHASE,
Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ......89
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
connection ........................................24
Support audio, HDMI set ...................101
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jack
■
T
Test tone, Equalizer ............................. 92
The Bottom Line,
Sound field program ........................ 49
The Roxy Theatre,
Sound field program ........................ 49
Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 52
Troubleshooting ................................. 113
TruBass ................................................ 81
Tuner indicators ................................... 30
Tuner, Troubleshooting ..................... 116
Turntable connection ........................... 23
TV Controlling, remote control ......... 102
■
U
Unable to play,
iPod status message ....................... 119
Unit, Speaker distance ......................... 90
Unknown iPod,
iPod status message ....................... 119
Unplug HP!, Automatic setup
UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
USER CANCEL,
identification number reset,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio,
SiriusConnect tuner
connection ........................................ 64
SL LEVEL,
Sound field parameter ...................... 79
Sound field programs ........................... 48
■
V
VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 26
VIDEO CONV.,
connection ........................................24
Surround back left/right speakers,
Surround back sound field initial delay,
Sound field parameter ......................76
Video settings .................................. 98
132 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Video conversion,
■
W
W-1:OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup
warning message ............................ 121
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup
warning message ............................ 121
W-3:LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup
warning message ............................ 121
W-4:CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup
warning message ............................ 121
■
X
XM Satellite Radio,
■
Y
■
Z
Zone 2 Initial volume,
Zone 2 settings ............................... 101
Zone 2 Maximum volume,
A
“
4
SPEAKERS” or “ DVD”
(example) indicates the name of
the parts on the front panel or the
remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or the pages at the
end of this manual for the
information about each position of
the parts.
133 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Front panel
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
VOLUME
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
SYSTEM OFF
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
ON/OFF
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Remote control
1
B
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
C
D
2
3
POWER
TV
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
AV
TUNER
SIRIUS
CD
A
XM
CBL
DTV
DOCK
V-AUX
MD
4
5
CD-R
PHONO
DVD
DVR
VCR
E
F
AMP
SOURCE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
TV
K
L
M
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
G
PROG
SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
6
7
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
9
0
ENT
9
0
10
H
I
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
MENU
LEVEL
TITLE
N O
P
Q
R
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
8
9
A-E/CAT.
RETURN
DISPLAY
J
MEMORY
INFO
PRG SELECT
0
A
REC
SCENE
1
2
3
4
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of remote control codes
MOTOROLA 10014, 10276,
UNITED ARTISTS
10007
UNITED CABLE
10003, 10011,
10014, 10276
US ELECTRONICS
ZENITH
11810
CABLE TV RECEIVER
10476, 10810,
11106, 11187,
11254, 11376
3M
10033
SATELLITE RECEIVER
AIWA
ALPHASTAR 10772
AMSTRAD
AUSTAR
A-MARK
ABC
10008, 10144
10003, 10007,
10008, 10011,
10014, 10033,
10237
MULTITECH 10883
11514, 11515
MYRIO
NEC
11602, 11822
11496
10003, 10008,
10276
10338
10879
NOVA VISION 10008
ACCUPHASE 10003, 10007,
10011, 10014
NOVAPLEX
NSC
OAK
10008
10012, 10637
10007
10008, 10237,
10877, 11877
V2
10883
10000
BELL EXPRESSVU
10775, 11170
CHAPARRAL 10216
COOLSAT 11806
CROSSDIGITAL
11109
VIDEOWAY
ACORN
ACTION
ACTIVE
10237
10237
10237
VIEWMASTER10883
VISION 10883
VORTEX VIEW10883
ZENITH 10000, 10525,
10899
PACE
AICHI DENSHI11512
AMERICAST 10899
PANASONIC 10000, 10008,
10107, 10144,
DIRECTV
10099, 10247,
10392, 10566,
10639, 10724,
10749, 10819,
11076, 11108,
11109, 11142,
11377, 11392,
11414, 11442,
11443, 11444,
11609, 11639,
11640, 11749,
11856
AMINO
ARCHER
BCC
11602, 11822
10237
10276
10375, 11488,
11758, 11759,
11760, 11936,
11937, 11938
CABLE/PVR
COMBINATION
AMERICAST 10899
AMINO
DIGEO
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10810
JERROLD
MOTOROLA 10810, 11106,
11187, 11376
MYRIO
PACE
PIONEER
RCA
BELL & HOWELL
10014
BELL SOUTH 10899
BRITISH TELECOM
10003
PANTHER
PARAGON
10637
10000, 10008,
10525
10000, 10637
10259, 10317,
11305
10144, 10533,
10877, 11021,
11500, 11782,
11877
10012
10000, 10040
10040
10000
10040
11822
11187
PENNEY
PHILIPS
CENTURY
CLEARMASTER
10883
10008
PIONEER
10810
CLEARMAX 10883
COMTRONICS 10040
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
10775, 11005,
COOL BOX
COOLMAX
DIGEO
DIGI
DIRECTOR
DUMONT
10883
10883
11187
10637
10476
10637
11170, 11505,
11775
11822
PRISM
10237, 11877
10877, 11877
11256
PULSAR
PULSER
QUASAR
R-LINE
RADIOSHACK 10883
RCA
DISHPRO
10775, 11005,
11505, 11775
DX ANTENNA 11530
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
10877, 11877
11006
SUPERCABLE 10276
ECHOSTAR
10775, 11005,
DX ANTENNA 11500, 11502
EMERSON 10014
EVERQUEST 10040
11170, 11505,
11775
SONY
11256
10259, 10273,
10276, 10279
REGAL
ESAT
10879
THOMSON
ZENITH
11256
10899
FOSGATE
FUJITSU
10276
11497
EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775
FORTEC STAR 11821, 11948
REMBRANDT 10011, 10040
GC ELECTRONICS
10040
10144
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10003, 10011,
RUNCO
SAMSUNG
10000
10003, 10040,
10144
FOXTEL
FUNAI
GE
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10869
10879, 11356
10338, 11377
10392, 10566
DBS/PVR
GE
COMBINATION
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
10000, 10003,
BELL EXPRESSVU
10775, 11170
10012, 10014,
10276, 10476,
10810
10008, 10012,
10237, 10477,
10877, 11510,
11877
11602
10011, 10040
GOI
10775, 11775
DIRECTV
10099, 10392,
10639, 11076,
11142, 11377,
11392, 11442,
11443, 11444,
11640
GOODMANS 11246
HISENSE
HITACHI
11535
GIBRALTER 10003
10214, 10749,
10819, 11250,
11518, 11523,
11525
10775
10775, 11775
GMI
10883
SEJIN
SIGNAL
SIGNATURE 10011
SL MARX
SONY
SPRUCER
STARCOM
STARGATE
STORM
SUMITOMO 11500, 11503,
11504
GOLDSTAR 10040, 10144
HAMLIN
HITACHI
10009, 10259,
10273
10003, 10008,
10009, 10011,
10033
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
10775, 11505
DISHPRO
10040
11006, 11460
10144
10003, 10014
10014, 10040
10637
HOUSTON
HTS
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
10749, 11142,
10775, 11505
10775, 11170,
11505
ECHOSTAR
HOUSTON
HYTEK
10011
10007
11442, 11443,
11444, 11749
11781, 11790
11535
10099
EXPRESSVU 10775
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
11142, 11442,
HYTEX
10007
HUMAX
ILO
INNOVA
JERROLD
JVC
I3 MICRO
INSIGHT
JEBSEE
11602
10476, 10810
10014
11443, 11444
11170
SUPERCABLE 10276
SUPERMAX 10883
JVC
10869
MOTOROLA 10869
JERROLD
10003, 10011,
10012, 10014,
10276, 10476,
10810
TELEAVIA
TELEVIEW
THOMSON
TIMELESS
TOCOM
10040
10040
11256
10040
10012
10003
10000, 11509
10883
10040
10492, 10775,
11170, 11507,
11531, 11532,
11775, 11793,
11797
PHILIPS
PROSCAN
RCA
SAMSUNG
SHARP
SONY
STAR CHOICE 10869
TIVO 11142, 11442,
11443, 11444
11142, 11442
10392
11392
11442
11489
10639, 11640
MACOM
10033
MASPRO
MEMOREX
11510
10000
TORX
LG
11226, 11414
TOSHIBA
TRISTAR
TV86
MAGNAVOX 10722, 10724
MASPRO 11520, 11530
MATSUSHITA 10214
MCINTOSH 10869
MITSUBISHI 10003
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMOREX
MITSUBISHI 10749
MOTOROLA 10856, 10869
NEC
10724
ADMIRAL
ADVENT
20017, 20047,
20051, 20054,
20093, 20179,
20180, 20264,
20463
20761, 20783,
20815, 20817,
20842
CAPEHART
20017, 20030,
20036, 20092,
20178
ELECTROBAND
20000
ELECTROGRAPH
21623, 21755
ELECTROHOME
20000, 20030,
10496, 11270,
11519
10099
CARNIVALE 20030
CARVER
CASIO
CCE
CELEBRITY 20000
CELERA 20765
CHAMPION 21362
CHANGHONG 20156, 20765,
20767, 20783
CINERAL
CITEK
20054, 20170
21205
20037
NETSAT
NEXT LEVEL 10869
OPTIMUS
OPTUS
PACE
PANASAT
PANASONIC 10214, 10247,
10701, 11508,
20150, 20154,
20178, 20463,
21672
10724
11356
11356
10879
ADVENTURI 20000
AGNA
AIKO
AIWA
AKAI
20150
20092
21180
EMERALD
EMERSON
20178
20036, 20047,
20150, 20154,
20170, 20171,
20178, 20179,
20180, 20236,
20451, 20463,
20623, 21394
21422, 21546
20030, 20813,
21365
20030, 20060,
20145, 20672,
20702, 20812,
21207, 21675,
21676, 21688,
21689, 21690,
21692, 21693,
21935
20092, 20451
20047
11526, 11527,
11528
11807
10724
10099, 10722,
10724, 10749,
10775, 10819,
11076, 11142,
11442, 11749
11142, 11442
CITIZEN
20000, 20030,
20054, 20060,
20092, 20171,
20180, 20186,
20451, 20463,
21669, 21671,
21672, 21935
20180
PANSAT
PAYSAT
PHILIPS
EMPREX
ENVISION
ALARON
ALBA
ALBATRON 20700, 20843
ALFIDE
ALLERON
20170, 20179
20037
EPSON
20833, 20840,
21122, 21290
20171, 20812
20000, 20054,
20154
CLARION
CLASSIC
COLORTYME 20017, 20030,
20047, 20054,
PIONEER
PRIMESTAR 10869
PROSCAN
PROTON
RADIOSHACK 10566, 10775,
10869
20030, 20092
ESA
FISHER
20672
20030, 20170
10392, 10566
11535
AMBASSADOR
20060, 20178
FORTRESS
FUJITSU
20093
20150
COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS
20047, 21447
CONIC
CONTEC
CRAIG
20179, 20186,
20683, 20809,
20853, 21181,
21607
AMERICA ACTION
20180
AMERICAN HIGH
20000, 20060
AMSTRAD
AMTRON
ANAM
ANAM NATIONAL
20161
AOC
RCA
10143, 10392,
10566, 10775,
10855, 11142,
11392, 11442
11108, 11109,
11142, 11276,
11377, 11442,
11609
11182, 11219
10494, 11489,
11513, 11517
10099, 10856
10163, 10275,
10294, 10639,
11524, 11639,
11640
20178
20180
20161, 20171,
20179, 20180
20000, 20030,
20054, 20171,
20180
FUJITSU GENERAL
20186
20171
20000, 20180
20180
SAMSUNG
CROSLEY
CROWN
FUNAI
20000, 20171,
20179, 20180,
20264, 20342,
21271
20093, 20180,
20672
SANYO
SHARP
20030, 20180,
21365, 21590
FUTURETECH 20180
CROWN MUSTANG
20672
CURTIS MATHES
GATEWAY
21001, 21002,
APEX DIGITAL
21003, 21004,
21755, 21756
20000, 20030,
20047, 20051,
20060, 20178,
20451, 21147,
21347, 21447
20047
SKY
SONY
20156, 20748,
20765, 20767,
20879, 20890,
21217
21531, 21548,
21738
20000, 20030,
GE
20037, 20047,
20051, 20054,
20060, 20093,
20145, 20154,
20166, 20178,
20179, 20180,
20451, 20702,
21147, 21347
20180
ASTAR
STAR CHOICE 10869
STAR TRAK 10772, 10869
THOMSON
TIVO
AUDINAC
AUDIOVOX
20180
GEMINI
10392, 10566
11142, 11442,
11443, 11444
10486, 10749,
10790, 11285,
11501, 11516,
11530, 11749
11356
20092, 20179,
20180, 20451,
20623, 20802,
20875, 21284
GENERAL
20186
GIBRALTER 20000, 20017,
20030
TOSHIBA
CXC
CYTRON
DAEWOO
GO VIDEO
20886
AVENTURA 20171
BAYCREST
BAYSONIC
BEAUMARK 20017, 20030,
20178, 20179
BELCOR
BELL & HOWELL
20054, 20093,
21326
GOLDSTAR 20030, 20036,
20037, 20047,
20054, 20178,
21154, 21378
GOODMANS 20037
20186
20180
20036, 20092,
20178, 20264,
20451, 20623,
20661, 20672,
21661, 21755,
21756
UEC
ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640
ULTRASAT
UNIDEN
11806
10722, 10724,
11521
20030
GPX
20179
GRADIENTE 20053, 20170
GRAN PRIX 20179
DAYTON
20092
US DIGITAL 11535
20154, 20179
21032, 21212,
21315
DAYTRON
20030, 20036,
20092, 20178
21080, 21178,
21264, 21403
21369
GRANADA
GRUNDIG
20037
USDTV
VOOM
11535
10869
BENQ
20037, 20672,
20683, 20706
20179, 20180
20179, 20180
21366
DELL
ZENITH
10856, 11810,
11856
BOXLIGHT
20893
GRUNDY
GRUNPY
H & B
BRADFORD 20180
BRILLIAN 21007, 21255,
21257, 21258
BROCKWOOD 20030, 20178
BROKSONIC 20180, 20236,
20463, 21935
DELTA
DENON
DREAM VISION
21164, 21297
DUMONT
20145, 20511
HAIER
21034, 21748
TV
HALLMARK 20178, 20179,
20180, 20236
HANNSPREE 21348, 21351,
21352, 21745
HARLEY DAVIDSON
20000, 20030,
3M
21616
20017, 20178,
20180
A-MARK
20047, 20054,
20160
BROTHER
BYD:SIGN
20264
DURABRAND 20171, 20178,
20180, 20463,
ACCURIAN
21803
21309, 21311,
21485, 21486
21283
ACCUSCAN 20047
ACTION 20030
21034
CADIA
CANDLE
DWIN
DYNEX
EATON
20093
21463
20060
20060, 20178,
20179, 20180
20030, 20186
HARMAN/KARDON
20054
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HARVARD
HAVERMY
HEATHKIT
HELIOS
HELLO KITTY 20451
HEWLETT PACKARD
20180
20093
20017
20865
LLOYD'S
LOGIK
20030, 20179,
20180, 20236
20179, 20180,
20236
MOTOROLA 20051, 20054,
20093, 20150,
PETTERS
PHILCO
21523
20030, 20054,
20145, 20179,
20186, 20463
20030, 20037,
20054, 20171,
20186, 20690,
21154, 21254,
21454, 21455,
21483, 21744
20030, 20051,
20060, 20178
20166, 20679,
20866, 21260,
21398, 21457
21496
20765, 20865,
21262, 21276,
21314, 21316,
21326, 21327,
21328, 21341,
21498, 21523,
21538, 21763,
21766, 21767,
21769, 22002
20835
MOXELL
MTC
20835
20030, 20060,
20092, 20180
LUMATRON 20037, 20264
LXI
PHILIPS
20000, 20017,
20030, 20036,
20037, 20047,
20051, 20053,
20054, 20060,
20093, 20154,
20156, 20166,
20171, 20178,
20179
21088, 21089,
MULTITECH 20179, 20180
21101, 21494,
21502, 21642
20748, 21660
20000, 20017,
20036, 20047,
20051, 20054,
20145, 20178,
20179, 21145,
21150, 21245,
21345, 21378,
21445
21088, 21089,
21101, 21494,
21502, 21642
21501
20849, 20865,
21219, 21294
20264
21286, 21603,
21684
20178, 20179,
20180, 20236
20054
21164, 21430,
21516
21603
NAD
20037, 20156,
20166, 20178,
20866, 21156
HISENSE
HITACHI
NAKAMICHI 21493
PILOT
NEC
20030, 20036,
20047, 20156,
20170, 20178,
20474, 20704,
20882, 21398,
21456, 21704,
21797
PIONEER
MACY
MAG
MAGNASONIC
20186
21498
PLANAR
POLAROID
20000, 20030,
20054, 20092,
20093, 20156,
20179
HP
NETTV
NIKKO
21755
20030, 20092,
20178
HUMAX
HYUNDAI
MAGNAVOX 20000, 20030,
20036, 20037,
20047, 20051,
20054, 20060,
20092, 20154,
20171, 20179,
20180, 20186,
20250, 20706,
20802, 21198,
21254, 21365,
21454, 21525,
21755
NIKKODO
20030, 20092,
20178
NIKO
NISHI
21581, 21618
20030
ICE
ILO
NORCENT
20748, 20824,
21089, 21365,
21589, 21590,
21591
PORTLAND 20092, 20451
PRECISION
PRIMA
20180, 20236
20761, 20783,
20815, 20817
IMA
INFINITY
INFOCUS
NORWOOD MICRO
21286, 21296,
PRINCETON 20700
PRISM
PROSCAN
20051, 20250
20047, 21347,
21447
20037, 20264
20178
21320, 21323
20835, 21401,
21498
21303
INITIAL
INNOVA
INSIGNIA
NTC
20092
20037
MAJESTIC
MARANTZ
20017
NYON
OLEVIA
20000
PROTEC
20171, 21204,
21326, 21517,
21564, 21641,
22002, 21710
20017, 20145
20054
20030, 20037,
20054, 20704,
20854, 20855,
21154, 21398,
21454
21144, 21240,
21331, 21610
20180
PROTON
PROTRON
PROVIEW
ONWA
OPTIMUS
20030, 20093,
20150, 20154,
20166, 20178,
20180, 20250,
20650
INTEQ
JBL
JCB
PROVISION 20037
MARK
MATSUI
MATSUSHITA 20051, 20161,
20250, 20650
MAXENT
20037
20036, 20037
PULSAR
PULSER
PUNEET
QUARTZ
QUASAR
20017, 20092
20092, 20178
21546
20150, 20178
20051, 20250,
20650
20000
JENSEN
20761, 20815,
20817, 21299
20030
20037
20030
20030, 20036,
20053, 20054,
20160, 20650,
20653, 20731,
21172, 21253,
21302, 21352,
21428, 21774
20017, 20180
20030
OPTOMA
20887, 21348,
21622, 21673,
21674
JIL
21211, 21714,
21755, 21756,
21757
JINXING
JUTAN
JVC
OPTONICA
ORION
20093
R-LINE
RABBIT
RADIOSHACK 20030, 20047,
20150, 20154,
20037
20047
MEGAPOWER 20700
MEGATRON 20047, 20145,
20178
20017, 20178,
20179, 20180,
20236, 20463,
21463
MEMOREX
20030, 20037,
20150, 20154,
20178, 20179,
20180, 20463
20037
20178, 20180
PACE
20092
RCA
20000, 20047,
20051, 20054,
20090, 20093,
20178, 20679,
21047, 21147,
21247, 21347,
21447, 21547,
21781, 22002
20030, 20047,
20150, 20154,
20178, 20180
20037
20017, 20030,
20060, 21292,
21397, 21398,
21628, 21629,
21638, 21639,
21679
PACIFIC
PALSONIC
20037
20264
KAMP
KAWASHO
KDS
KEC
KENWOOD
KLH
MERMAID
MGA
PANASONIC 20000, 20030,
20051, 20054,
20156, 20161,
20236, 20250,
20650, 20863,
21168, 21175,
21177, 21291,
21310, 21335,
21410, 21480,
21510
20030, 20150,
20178
21498
20060, 20180
20030, 20180
20156, 20180,
20765, 20767
20030
MGN TECHNOLOGY
20178
MICRO
MICRO GENIUS
20150
21436
REALISTIC
KLOSS
KONKA
KOST
20180
MIDLAND
20017, 20047,
20051
20037
REVOX
RUNCO
21262, 21483
20030, 20180,
20463
KTV
MINATO
MINTEK
MITSUBISHI 20030, 20036,
20093, 20150,
PANDA
PAUSA
PAXONIC
PCE
20706
20179
20030, 20060
20060, 20156,
20179
21603
LARK
LG
20154
20030, 20054,
20060, 20178,
20442, 20700,
20856, 21154,
21178, 21265,
21325, 21378,
21423, 21663,
21758
20154, 20160,
20178, 20250,
20836, 20868,
21150, 21171,
21182, 21250,
21392, 21522,
21550
PENNEY
20000, 20030,
20036, 20037,
20047, 20051,
20060, 20156,
20161, 20178,
20250, 21347,
21378
SAMPO
20030, 20047,
21755, 21756
MONIVISION 20700, 20843
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAMSUNG
20017, 20030,
20036, 20037,
20047, 20054,
20060, 20154,
20178, 20264,
20587, 20702,
20766, 20812,
20814, 21060,
21312, 21395,
21458
20030, 20060
20030, 20060,
20463, 21935
20000, 20036,
20037, 20047,
20054, 20088,
20154, 20171,
20376, 20424,
20463, 20799,
20893, 21142,
21179, 21755
20060
SPECTRONIQ 21498
SQUAREVIEW 20171
TOTEVISION 20051
TOYOMENKA 20178
PVR
ABS
ALIENWARE 31972
CYBERPOWER31972
DELL
DIRECTV
GATEWAY
GO VIDEO
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HITACHI
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
SR
2000, 20154,
TRUETONE
TRUTECH
TVS
20051, 20250
21723
20463
31972
20171
SSS
20180
STARLITE
20180, 20236
ULTRA
20092, 21323
31972
30739
31972
30614
STUDIO EXPERIENCE
20843
SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864
SUPRE-MACY 20186
UNIVERSAL 20047
UNIVERSUM 20036, 20037,
20170, 20264,
20474
SANKY
SANSUI
SUPREME
SV2000
SVA
20000
20054
20587, 20748,
20865, 20870,
20871
US LOGIC
V
21286, 21303
20864, 20885,
21755, 21756
30140, 31718
SANYO
VECTOR RESEARCH
20030
HP
31972
SYLVANIA
20000, 20030,
20036, 20037,
20047, 20051,
20054, 20092,
20154, 20171,
20178, 20179,
20186, 21271,
21314, 21394
VEOS
21007
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
30739
HUMAX
VICTOR
20036, 20053,
20160, 20653,
21428
30739, 31797,
31988
31972
VIDIKRON
20054, 21292,
21302, 21397,
21398, 21628,
21629
HUSH
IBUYPOWER 31972
JVC
LINKSYS
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MICROSOFT 31972
SAVILLE
SCEPTRE
31279
31972
20878, 21217,
21360, 21599
20178
SYMPHONIC 20000, 20171,
20178, 20179,
VIDTECH
20036, 20178
SCOTCH
SCOTT
VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864,
20885, 21330,
20030, 20178,
20179, 20180,
20236, 21711
20000, 20017,
20030, 20036,
20037, 20047,
20051, 20053,
20054, 20060,
20093, 20154,
20156, 20166,
20171, 20178,
20179, 21007
21297, 21351
20036, 20054,
20093, 20179,
20180, 20256,
20787, 20818,
20851, 21165,
21453, 21459,
21602
20180
SYNTAX
21144, 21240,
21331, 21610
20093
21542, 21578,
21627, 21640,
21742, 21755
20060
21207, 21684
21336
20864, 20885,
21499, 21755,
21756, 21758
20000, 20017,
20030, 20037,
20047, 20051,
20054, 20093,
20154, 20166,
20178, 20179,
20186, 20236,
20866, 21156
20156
MIND
31972
MITSUBISHI 31714
NIVEUS MEDIA
31972
NORTHGATE 31972
PANASONIC 30614, 30616,
31244, 31732,
SEARS
TANDY
TATUNG
20000, 20037,
20051, 21101,
21285, 21286,
21287, 21288,
21361, 21756
20037, 20154,
20264, 20706
20051, 20054,
20250
VIKING
VIORE
VISART
VIZIO
31807, 31808,
31809
TEAC
WARDS
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
REPLAYTV
SAMSUNG
SHARP
30618, 30739
31337, 31803
30880
30614, 30616
30739
TECHNICS
TECHNOL ACE
SELECO
SHARP
20179
TECHNOVOX 20030
TECHWOOD 20051, 20060,
20250
TECO
TEKNIKA
31742, 31810,
31893
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616
SONY
21040
WAYCON
WELTON
30636, 31447,
31448, 31636,
31972
20054, 20060,
20092, 20150,
20178, 20179,
20180, 20186,
20463
20178
SHENG CHIA 20093
SHERWOOD 21399
20037, 20178
20145
SIGNATURE 20030, 20047,
20093, 20179
WESTINGHOUSE
20000, 20451,
STACK 9
31972
SHIVAKI
SIEMENS
20885, 20889,
20890, 21092,
21282, 21577,
SYSTEMAX 31972
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TELECOLOR 20017
TELEFUNKEN 20702
21712
TIVO
30618, 30636,
SIGNET
SIM2 MULTIMEDIA
21297
21262
TELETON
TEVION
THOMAS
THOMSON
TMK
20186
20037
20047, 20178
20047, 21447
20178, 20180,
20236
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
20179, 20236,
30739, 31337
30828, 31008,
31739, 31972,
31988, 31996
31972
TOSHIBA
20451, 20463,
20623, 20889
SIMPSON
20030, 20178,
20186
20060, 20092
WINBOOK
WORLD
21381
TOUCH
VICTOR
SINGER
SKY-NORTH 20037
SOLAR DRAPE20000
SOLE
SONY
20180, 20236,
20451, 20463
21365
31706
TNCI
TOCOM
TOSHIBA
20017
20156
VIEWSONIC 31972
WYSE
VOODOO
ZT GROUP
31972
31972
20813
20036, 20060,
20145, 20150,
20154, 20156,
20166, 20264,
20509, 20650,
20832, 20845,
21145, 21156,
21164, 21169,
21173, 21256,
21265, 21306,
21325, 21343,
21356, 21369,
21429, 21456,
21524, 21635,
21656, 21704,
21935
XR-1000
20154, 20171,
20179, 20180
20030, 20769,
20833, 20839,
21405, 21406,
21407, 21526,
21522
20000, 20017,
20036, 20053,
20150, 20154,
20810, 20834,
20867, 21100,
21167, 21300,
21317, 21651,
21685
YAMAHA
VCR
A-MARK
30000, 30037,
30046, 30240,
30278
31972
30000
30020, 30039,
30047, 30048,
30060, 30062,
30065, 30104,
30209, 30479
YORX
20030
ABS
ACCURIAN
ADMIRAL
ZENITH
20000, 20017,
20030, 20037,
20047, 20092,
20093, 20145,
20160, 20171,
20178, 20463,
20812, 21145,
21265
SOUNDESIGN 20178, 20179,
20180, 20186
SOVA
SOYO
SPECTRAVISION
20156, 20178,
20179, 20186
21320
21520, 21546
ADVENTURA 30000, 30037,
30240
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADYSON
AIKO
30072
30278
CYBERPOWER31972
GOODMANS 30000, 30020,
30037, 30062,
M ELECTRONIC
30240
DAEWOO
30020, 30037,
AIWA
30000, 30037,
30124, 30307,
30348, 30479,
31137, 31284,
31291, 31332,
31336
30041, 30049,
30061, 30106,
30175, 30242
30072, 30209,
30278, 30295
30045, 30046,
30278, 30561,
30637, 31137,
31278
30020, 30037,
30278
30040
31972
30042, 30081
30041
30739
30072, 30081,
30278, 30637
GRADIENTE 30000, 30008,
30408
MAGNASONIC
30000, 30020,
30037, 30072,
30082, 30240,
30278, 30593,
31278
DAYTRON
GRANADA
GRUNDIG
30042, 30081
30034, 30081,
30226
AKAI
ALBA
DBX
DELL
DENON
DERWENT
DIRECTV
DUAL
MAGNAVOX 30000, 30035,
30037, 30039,
HARLEY DAVIDSON
30000
HARMAN/KARDON
30048, 30054,
30081, 30110,
30149, 30226,
30240, 30563,
30038, 30075,
30081
ALIENWARE 31972
30000
ALLEGRO
AMERICA ACTION
30039, 31137
DUMONT
30040
HARVARD
HARWOOD
HEADQUARTER
30046
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HI-Q
30068, 30072
30068, 30072
30593, 30618,
31593, 31781
30240
30035, 30038,
30062, 30081,
31381
DURABRAND 30038, 30039
DYNATECH 30000, 30240
ELECTROHOME
30000, 30037,
30278
AMERICAN HIGH
30035, 30081
30000
ANAM NATIONAL
30226
MAGNIN
MARANTZ
AMSTRAD
30043, 30060,
30061, 30209,
30240
30000, 30035,
30047
MARTA
MATSUI
30037
30036, 30037,
30209, 30295,
30348
ASHA
ASTRA
AUDIO DYNAMICS
30040
AUDIOVOX
30240
30035, 30240
ELECTROPHONIC
30037
EMERALD
EMEREX
HITACHI
30000, 30035,
30037, 30041,
30042, 30045,
30065, 30082,
30089, 30105,
30140, 30166,
30544, 31037,
31286, 31326,
31718
30121, 30184
30032
MATSUSHITA 30035, 30081,
30162, 30226,
31162
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
30037, 30038,
30054, 30278
30000, 30072
EMERSON
30000, 30002,
30036, 30037,
30043, 30061,
30068, 30121,
30184, 30202,
30208, 30209,
30212, 30240,
30278, 30295,
30348, 30378,
30479, 30510,
30561, 30593,
30637, 31278,
31479, 31593
31137
30000, 30039,
30046, 30047,
30054, 30066,
30104
30033, 30035
30000, 30045
30000, 30037,
30072, 30278,
30593, 31333,
31593
AVIS
BEAUMARK 30240
BELL & HOWELL
MEDION
MEI
MEMOREX
30348
30035
30000, 30035,
30039, 30046,
30048, 30104,
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
30042, 30739
HUMAX
30000, 30035,
30037, 30039,
30046, 30047,
30048, 30054,
30062, 30072,
30104, 30162,
30209, 30240,
30278, 30307,
30348, 30479,
31037, 31162,
31237, 31262
30037
31972
30479
BROKSONIC 30002, 30121,
30184, 30208,
30739, 31797,
31988
31972
30000, 30036,
30047, 30072
30209, 30295,
30348, 30479,
31479
30037
30037, 30038
30034, 30035
30002, 30020,
30062
HUSH
HYTEK
ESA
FISHER
CALIX
CANDLE
CANON
IBUYPOWER 31972
INSTANT REPLAY
METZ
MGA
CAPEHART
30035, 30226
30041, 30240
30240
30043, 30060,
30061, 30240
FUJI
FUJITSU
FUNAI
ITT NOKIA
JANEIL
JENSEN
JVC
CARRERA
CARVER
CCE
CINERAL
CINEVISION 31137
30240
MGN TECHNOLOGY
30240
MICROSOFT 31972
30035, 30081
30072, 30278
30278
30041, 30067
30008, 30041,
30061, 30067,
30206, 31162,
31279, 31283,
31299, 31329
30037, 30278
30038, 30041,
30046, 30067
30072
30035, 30037
30000
30037, 30038,
30240, 31037,
31137
30348
31972
30000, 30036,
30038, 30040,
30072, 30208,
30240
30081
30000, 30072,
30240
MIDLAND
MIND
MINOLTA
30240
31972
30042, 30105
CITIZEN
30000, 30035,
GARRARD
GATEWAY
GE
30000
31972
30036, 30037,
30209, 30240,
30278, 30479,
31278
MITSUBISHI 30000, 30041,
30042, 30043,
30000, 30035,
30048, 30060,
30065, 30077,
30149, 30202,
30240, 30760,
30761, 30807,
31035, 31060
30060
30045
30000, 30037,
30278
30240, 30279,
30432, 30526,
30614, 30643,
31137
KEC
KENWOOD
30047, 30048,
30060, 30061,
30067, 30075,
30173, 30214,
30242, 30443,
30807, 31343,
31631, 31714
CLASSIC
COLORTYME 30035, 30045,
30060, 30278
COLT
CRAIG
30037
KLH
KODAK
KTV
LG
30000, 30072
30037, 30047,
30072, 30240,
30271
GEMINI
GENERAL
GENEXXA
MOTOROLA 30035, 30048
MOVIE WALKER
30072
LIFETEC
LINKSYS
LLOYD'S
CRITERION 30000, 30072
CROSLEY
30000, 30035,
30081, 30110,
30149
GO VIDEO
MTC
30000, 30072,
30240
30000
MTX
CROWN
CURTIS MATHES
30000, 30035,
30072, 30278
MULTITECH 30000, 30039,
30072
GOLDSTAR 30000, 30035,
30037, 30038,
LOEWE
LOGIK
NAD
NEC
30104, 30240
30038, 30040,
30041, 30067,
30082, 30104,
31287, 31288
30072
30041, 30060,
30162, 30240,
30278, 30432,
30643, 30760,
31035
30039, 30054,
30278, 31137,
31237
LUMATRON 30278
LUXOR
LXI
30046, 30106
30000, 30037,
30042, 30054,
30067
NEW TECH
NIKKO
CYBERNEX 30240
30037, 30278
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIKKODO
NIKON
NISHI
30037, 30278
30034
30240
PULSAR
30039, 30240,
30278
30240
30046
30035, 30046,
30047
30002, 30035,
30077, 30162,
30226, 31035,
31162
SEARS
30000, 30033,
30034, 30035,
30036, 30037,
30039, 30041,
30042, 30043,
30045, 30046,
30047, 30048,
30054, 30060,
30065, 30066,
30067, 30072,
30104, 30105,
30162, 30209,
31237
30000, 30032,
30047, 30048,
30062, 30065,
30807, 30848,
31285, 31742,
31810, 31893
30000, 30039,
30072, 30208,
30240
THOMAS
THOMSON
30000, 30002
30041, 30060,
30202
PULSER
QUARTER
QUARTZ
NIVEUS MEDIA
31972
30240
NORTHGATE 31972
TISONIC
TIVO
30278
30618, 30636,
30739, 31337,
31996
30000, 30036,
30208, 30240
30037
NOBLEX
QUASAR
OLYMPUS
30035, 30104,
30162, 30226
30222
TMK
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
TNIX
TOCOM
TOSHIBA
30000, 30035,
30037, 30047,
30048, 30054,
30062, 30104,
30162, 30240,
30432, 30593,
31048, 31062,
31162, 31262
30062
30000, 30002,
30036, 30104,
30121, 30184,
30208, 30209,
30240, 30278,
30295, 30479,
31479
RADIOSHACK 30000, 30035,
30037, 30046,
30047, 30048,
30062, 30066,
30104, 30162,
30240, 31037,
31162
RADIX
RANDEX
RCA
30240
30000, 30041,
30042, 30043,
30045, 30054,
30062, 30066,
30209, 30210,
30212, 30240,
30544, 30828,
30845, 31008,
31145, 31289,
31290, 31323,
31325, 31739,
31972, 31988,
31996
SHARP
30037
30037
OPTONICA
ORION
30000, 30035,
30042, 30045,
30048, 30054,
30060, 30065,
30077, 30105,
30106, 30149,
30166, 30202,
30240, 30760,
30761, 30807,
30880, 31035,
31060
30000, 30035,
30037, 30046,
30047, 30048,
30062, 30065,
30066, 30104,
30121, 30162,
30240, 30278,
31162
SHINTOM
SHOGUN
SIEMENS
SIGNATURE 30000, 30035,
30037, 30046,
30240
30037, 30104
TOSONIC
TOTEVISION 30037, 30240
TOUCH
TRIX
ULTRA
30278
PANAMA
30035
30048, 30060,
30065, 30066,
30149, 30479
30037, 30072,
30240
31972
30037
30020, 30045,
30278
30240
PANASONIC 30000, 30020,
30035, 30077,
30162, 30225,
30226, 30378,
30614, 30616,
31035, 31062,
31162, 31244,
31262, 31292,
31293, 31308,
31317, 31732,
31807, 31808,
31809
SINGER
REALISTIC
REPLAYTV
RICAVISION 31972
RICOH
RIO
RUNCO
SALORA
SAMSUNG
UNITECH
VECTOR
VECTOR RESEARCH
30038, 30040,
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616,
30643, 31137
SONOGRAPHE30046
30045
SONY
30000, 30032,
30033, 30034,
30035, 30046,
30047, 30049,
30067, 30226,
30636, 31032,
31232, 31295,
31296, 31297,
31447, 31448,
31636, 31702,
31972
30184
30072
30008, 30041,
30067, 31283,
31299, 31706
VEXTRA
VICTOR
30614, 30616
PENNEY
30000, 30035,
30037, 30038,
30040, 30042,
30047, 30054,
30067, 30077,
30081, 30162,
30240, 31035,
31237
VIDEO CONCEPTS
30040, 30045,
30034
31137
30039
30075
30061, 30210,
30242
VIDEOMAGIC 30037
VIDEOSONIC 30000, 30072,
30240
30000, 30038,
30045, 30060,
30077, 30240,
30432, 30739,
31014
30240, 30643
30039, 30048
30000, 30002,
30041, 30067,
30072, 30082,
30209, 30240,
30271, 30479,
31479
SOUNDMASTER
30000
STACK 9
STS
SV2000
SVA
SYLVANIA
VIEWSONIC 31972
PENTAX
PHILCO
30042, 30065,
30105
31972
VILLAIN
VOODOO
WARDS
30000
31972
30042, 30105
30000, 30072
30000
30000, 30035,
30043, 30081,
30110, 30593,
31593, 31781
30000, 30035,
30081, 30110,
30209, 30479
30000, 30034,
30035, 30045,
30048, 30062,
30081, 30110,
30162, 30209,
30616, 30618,
30739, 31081,
31181, 31266,
31381
SAMTRON
SANKY
SANSUI
30000, 30033,
30035, 30037,
30038, 30041,
30042, 30043,
30045, 30046,
30047, 30048,
30060, 30062,
30065, 30072,
30081, 30149,
30212, 30240,
30479, 30760
PHILIPS
SYMPHONIC 30000, 30002,
30240, 30593,
SANYO
30000, 30046,
30047, 30104,
30159, 30240,
30479, 31330,
31331
31593
SYSTEMAX 31972
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TANDY
TASHIKO
TATUNG
WHARFEDALE
PILOT
PIONEER
30037
30000, 30104
30037
30593
30042, 30067,
30081, 30162,
31337, 31803
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
30008
SCOTT
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
30000, 30072,
30000, 30008,
30041, 30048,
30067, 30081
30000, 30041,
30067
30000, 30035,
30037, 30162
30000, 30035,
30037
30036, 30043,
30209, 30278,
30479, 30637
POLK AUDIO 30081
PORTLAND 30020, 30278
PRESIDIAN
PROFITRONIC 30240
30045, 30121,
30184, 30208,
30210, 30212
TEAC
WORLD
XR-1000
30002, 30209,
30479
30000, 30035,
30072, 30208,
30240
31593
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
PROSCAN
30060, 30202,
30760, 30761,
31060
YAMAHA
30038, 30041
PROTEC
PROTECH
30000, 30072
30072
TELECORDER 30240
TELEFUNKEN 30041, 30208
TEVION
30479
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ZENITH
30000, 30033,
30034, 30037,
30039, 30041,
30209, 30278,
30479, 30637,
31137, 31139,
31479
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
GE
40522, 40717,
40815
40750
LASONIC
40627, 40798,
41173, 41747
41533
41127
40671
40591, 40741,
40801, 40869,
41526, 41600
41058, 41158,
41416, 41440,
41656, 41738
40511, 40741
40783
40690
CARY AUDIO DESIGN
41477
GENICA
GO VIDEO
LECSON
LENOXX
LEXICON
LG
40573, 40715,
40717, 40741,
40744, 40783,
40833, 40869,
41044, 41075,
41099, 41144,
41148, 41158,
41304, 41443,
41483, 41730
41071, 41072
40741, 40801,
40869
CAVS
41057, 41387
CELESTIAL 41020
CENTREX
CENTRIOS
CINEA
40672, 41004
41577
40831
ZT GROUP
31972
LITEON
CINEMATRIX 41052
CINEVISION 40833, 40869,
40876, 41483
DVD PLAYER
3D LAB
ACCURIAN
40503, 40539
40675, 41072,
41416, 41737
LOEWE
LOGIX
MAGNASONIC40651, 40675
MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,
40646, 40675,
CITIZEN
40695, 41003,
41277, 41587,
42116
GO VISION
GOLDSTAR
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
40730
CLAIRTONE 40571
GOODMANS 40790
ADCOM
ADVENT
AFREEY
AIWA
41094
41016
40698
40641
40695, 40705,
40770, 40899,
41089
40672, 40717
40790
CLASSE
COBY
41543
GPX
40699, 40769
40821, 41268,
41354, 41472,
41506
40778, 40852,
41077, 41086,
41107, 41165,
41177, 41321,
41351, 41628
40831
GRADIENTE 40490, 40651
GREENHILL 40717
GRUNDIG
HARMAN/KARDON
40582, 40702
42080
HELLO KITTY 40831
40539, 40705
MALATA
MARANTZ
40782, 41159
40503, 40539,
40675, 41627
41273, 41373,
41533
40651
40695, 40831,
41270
AKAI
CRAIG
CREATIVE
CURTIS MATHES
41087
CYBERHOME 40816, 40874,
41023, 41024,
HELIOS
MCINTOSH
ALBA
ALCO
40503, 40539
HITACHI
40573, 40664,
MEDION
MEMOREX
ALLEGRO
AMPHION MEDIA WORKS
40872, 41245
40869
41247, 41664,
41764, 41765,
41766
MERIDIAN
41497
AMW
APEX DIGITAL
40872, 41245
41117, 41129,
41502, 41537
40705
41881
40705, 40770,
40784, 40833,
40869, 41169,
41172, 41234,
41242, 41441,
41443
40770
40122, 40872
40770
HITEKER
HUMAX
I-O DATA
ILO
INITIAL
INNOVATIVE TECHNOLOGY
41542
40672
41500, 41588
41405
41348, 41472
40717, 41472
MICROSOFT 40522, 41708,
42083
40533, 40672,
40717, 40755,
40794, 40795,
40796, 40797,
40830, 40856,
41004, 41020,
41056, 41061,
41100, 41126
40732
CYTRON
D-LINK
DAEWOO
MINATO
MINTEK
40752
40717, 40839,
41472
MITSUBISHI 40521, 41403,
41521, 41629
INOI
INSIGNIA
41747
MIXSONIC
MOMITSU
MUSTEK
MYRYAD
NAD
41130
41082, 41626
40730
40894
40692, 40741
40770
41013, 41268,
41712, 42095
40571, 40627,
41634
ARCAM
ARRGO
ASPIRE DIGITAL
40594, 41168,
DANSAI
DAYTEK
DECCA
DENON
INTEGRA
41023
INTERVIDEO 41124
IRT
NAIKO
40490, 40634,
41282, 41634,
42134
40778
41407, 41455
40783
41078
40702
40174, 41016
40695
NAKAMICHI 41222
41391, 41407
41461, 41489,
41494, 41678,
41679
JATON
JBL
JENSEN
JMB
JSI
NAXA
NEC
41473
40785, 40869,
41404
ASTAR
DENVER
DESAY
NESA
40717
AUDIOLOGIC 40736
AUDIOVOX
DIAMOND VISION
41316, 41609,
41610
DIGITALMAX 41738
41423
NEUNEO
40509, 41454
40717, 40790,
JVC
40558, 40623,
40867, 41164,
41241, 41275,
41550, 41590,
41591, 41592,
41594, 41602
41049, 41051,
41469, 41675
NEXT BASE 40826
NEXXTECH 41402
41041, 41071,
41072, 41121,
41122
40730
41071, 41072
40655, 40662
NINTAUS
41051
DIGITREX
DISNEY
DIVIDO
DUAL
40672
40675, 41270
40705
40675, 41068,
41085
NORCENT
40719, 40872,
41003, 41107,
41265, 41457,
41461
AWA
AXION
B & K
JWIN
BANG & OLUFSEN
41696
41224
NOVA
41517, 41518,
41519, 41520
40503, 40627,
40792, 41417,
41418, 41612,
41627, 41769
40575, 41224,
41525, 42115
40571
DURABRAND 41127
DVD2000 40521
ELECTROHOME
41003, 41729,
KALEIDESCAPE
41790
KAWASAKI
KENWOOD
BBK
ONKYO
BEL CANTO DESIGN
41571
BLADELIUS 41682
BLAUPUNKT 40717
BLUE PARADE40571
BLUE SKY
BOSE
BOSS AUDIO SYSTEMS
41680
BRANDT
BROKSONIC 40695, 40868,
41419
BUSH
BYD:SIGN
40790
40490, 40534,
40682, 40737
40717, 40790,
41020, 41149,
41261
42116
40690
40591, 40675,
40821, 41268
41374
ELTA
EMERSON
KLH
OPPO
40695, 40699
41895
OPTIMUS
ENCORE
KLOSS
KONKA
40533
OPTOMEDIA ELECTRONICS
40896
ENTERPRISE 40591
40711, 40719,
40720, 40721
41677
40651, 40769,
40896, 41061,
41423
ENTIVO
ENZER
ESA
40503, 40539
40770
40821, 41268,
41443
40651
40670
40675, 41268,
41334
41073, 41077,
41158, 41194
ORION
41695
40651
KOSCH
KOSS
ORITRON
PALSONIC
40651
40672, 40852
PANASONIC 40490, 40503,
40571, 40632,
40690
40872
FIRSTLINE
FISHER
FUNAI
KREISEN
KRELL
LAFAYETTE 41369
LANDEL 40826
41421
41498
40703, 41010,
41011, 41282,
41362, 41462,
41490, 41632,
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
40490
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
41471
GATEWAY
41641, 41762
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHILCO
PHILIPS
40675, 40690
40503, 40539,
40646, 40671,
40675, 40854,
41260, 41267,
41340, 41354,
41846, 42056,
42084
SHERWOOD 40633, 40770,
41043, 41077,
WINTEL
WYSE
XBOX
41131
41652
40522, 41708,
42083
41001
40490, 40497,
40539, 40545,
40817, 41282,
42543, 42544
COBY
CYBERHOME 51129, 51502
DENON 50490
DIGITALMAX 51738
ELECTROHOME
52116
51086
41889
SHINSONIC 40533, 40839
SIGMA DESIGNS
40674
XWAVE
YAMAHA
SILVERCREST 41368
EMERSON
FUNAI
GATEWAY
50675
SLIM ART
SM ELECTRONIC
40690, 40730
40784
50675, 51334
51073, 51158,
51194
PHONOTREND40699
PIANODISC 41024
YAMAKAWA 40872
PIONEER
40142, 40525,
SONIC BLUE 40573, 40715,
40783, 40869,
ZENITH
40503, 40591,
40741, 40869
40784
GO VIDEO
50741, 51158,
51304, 51730
51664, 51764
51348
51164, 51275
51421
50741
51158, 51416,
51440, 51738
40571, 40631,
40632, 40638,
41460, 41475,
41476, 41512,
41571
41013, 41020,
41061, 41086,
41245, 41261,
41316, 41478,
41480, 41482
41099
ZEUS
ZOECE
HITACHI
ILO
JVC
KREISEN
LG
LITEON
SONY
40533, 40772,
40864, 41033,
41069, 41070,
41431, 41433,
41516, 41533,
41536, 41548,
41633
41265
BLU-RAY/HD DVD
PLAYER
LG
ONKYO
POLAROID
40741
41769
MAGNAVOX 50646, 50675,
51506
MITSUBISHI 51403, 51629
SOVA
41122
PANASONIC 41641
POLK AUDIO 40539
PORTLAND 40770
PRESIDIAN
SUNGALE
41074, 41342,
41532
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
SAMSUNG
SONY
42084
40142
41769
40199
41516
41515, 41769
NEC
51404
40675, 41072,
41738
41016
40886, 41467,
41618
SUPERSCAN 40821
PANASONIC 50490, 51010,
51011
PHILIPS
SVA
40717, 40860,
PRIMA
PRIMARE
41105
50646, 51340
50631, 51460,
51475, 51476,
51512
51086
51738
50522
50490
51583
SYLVANIA
40675, 40821,
41268
PIONEER
TOSHIBA
PRINCETON 40674
SYMPHONIC 40675, 40821,
41268, 41334
TAG MCLAREN
40894
LD PLAYER
AIWA
CARVER
DENON
PROCEED
PROSCAN
PROSONIC
PROTRON
PROVISION
QWESTAR
RADIONETTE 40741
RADIOSHACK 40571
RCA
40672
40522
40699
41461
40778
40651
POLAROID
PRESIDIAN
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SENSORY SCIENCE
51158
SHARP
SONY
40203
40064, 40194
40059, 40172,
40241
TATUNG
TEAC
40770
40571, 40692,
40717, 40790,
40809
DISCO VISION
40023
40203
TECHNICS
TECHNIKA
40490, 40703
40770
50630, 50675,
51556, 51642,
52550
51033, 51069,
51070, 51431,
51433, 51536
50675
51510, 51588,
51639
FUNAI
HARMAN/KARDON
40194
HITACHI
KENWOOD
MAGNAVOX 40064, 40194,
40217, 40241
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI 40059, 40241
NAD
40522, 40571,
40717, 40790,
40822, 41013,
41022, 41132,
41193, 41769
40571
TECHNOSONIC
40730
TECHWOOD 40692
40023
40236, 40258
TERAPIN
41031, 41053,
REALISTIC
REALMAGIC 40674
REOC
REVOY
RIO
41166
40651
SYLVANIA
TOSHIBA
TEVION
40064, 40194
40752
40699
40869
40118, 41360,
41376
40623, 41178,
41734
40823, 41004
40651
40698, 40752,
41501
40199, 40490,
40573, 40744,
40820, 40899,
41044, 41075,
41470, 41599,
42069
40695, 41695
40670, 40675,
40695, 40873,
41334, 41583
THETA DIGITAL
40571
40511, 40522
THULE AUDIO41007
VICTOR
YAMAHA
ZENITH
51597, 51275
52544
50741
40059
40059
THOMSON
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC 40204
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RJTECH
TIVO
41503, 41512,
40064, 40194
40023, 40059,
40241
ROTEL
41588
CD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC RESEARCH
TOSHIBA
40503, 40539,
40573, 40695,
41045, 41154,
41503, 41510,
41515, 41588,
41595, 41608,
41639, 41769
40799, 40800,
40803, 40804
40770
ROWA
SABA
SAMPO
POLK AUDIO 40194
60420
60018
60234
60305
60157
60083, 60643,
61688
QUASAR
REALISTIC
SEGA
SHARP
SONY
TECHNICS
THETA DIGITAL
40194
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
WARDS
40204
40203
40023
40001
40193, 40201
40204
ADC
ADCOM
ADMIRAL
AIWA
SAMSUNG
TREDEX
AKAI
UNIMAX
UNITED
ALBA
60625
40730
ANAM NATIONAL
60362
60157
40059
40245
40059
40217
SANSUI
SANYO
UNIVERSUM 40591
URBAN CONCEPTS
ARCAM
40503, 40539
40839
41064, 41126,
41226
AUDIO PRO 60437
AUDIO RESEARCH
60157
BURMESTER 60420
CAIRN
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
60029, 60303
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
61731
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
60157
YAMAHA
US LOGIC
V
SCHNEIDER 40783
SCHWAIGER 40752
SENSORY SCIENCE
41158
DVD RECORDER
ACCURIAN
APEX DIGITAL
VENTURER 40790
60157
50675, 51416
VIALTA
VICTOR
41509
41241, 41597
SHARP
40630, 40675,
51056
ASPIRE DIGITAL
51168
51489
BROKSONIC 51419
CITIZEN 52116
40752, 41256,
41556, 41642,
42550
VIEWMAGE 41374
VIZIO
41064, 41126,
41226
ASTAR
SHARPER IMAGE
41117
VOCOPRO
WESDER
41027, 41360
40699
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARVER
60157, 60179,
60437
MYRYAD
NAD
NAKAMICHI 60147, 60373
NEC
NIKKO
NSM
60157
61208
TDK
TEAC
61208
RCA
SHARP
70027
70205, 70371,
70412
70170, 70243,
70291
70308, 70309,
70365
60180, 60362,
60420, 60490
60029, 60303
CARY AUDIO DESIGN
61876
CCE
CLASSIC
CURTIS MATHES
60032
60043, 60234
60362, 60625
60157
TECHNICS
SONY
60643
61297
TECHWOOD 60303, 60362
THULE AUDIO
60157
TIVOLI AUDIO
61553
TOSHIBA
UNIVERSUM 60437
VICTOR
WARDS
TEAC
ONKYO
60101, 60868,
61327, 61685
60000, 60032,
60037, 60087,
60145, 60179,
60305, 60420,
60437, 60468,
61063, 61075
TECHNICS
TECHNOVOX 70229
TECHWOOD 70365
VICTOR
WARDS
YAMAHA
70229
DENON
60003, 60034,
60626, 60766,
60873
OPTIMUS
61693, 61694
70273
70027
70097, 70205,
70524
DKK
60000
60072
DMX ELECTRONICS
60157
EMERSON
FISHER
60032, 60053,
60087, 60157,
60179
60036, 60490,
60868, 60888,
61292, 62907,
62909
60305
60000, 60179,
61325
60305
60420
PANASONIC 60029, 60303,
60388, 60752,
YAMAHA
TUNER
ADC
ADCOM
61682
FUNAI
GARRARD
GEMINI
GENEXXA
GOLDSTAR 61208
GPX
GRUNDIG
HAFLER
HARMAN/KARDON
60083, 60100,
PARASOUND 60420
PENNEY
PHILIPS
80531
80616, 81616,
81617
80121, 80158,
80189, 81243,
81321, 81347,
81388, 81405,
81641
60029
60157, 60274,
60626
60032, 60305,
60468, 61062,
61063, 61087
60625
60032, 60305
YBA
YORX
60625
60000
AIWA
PIONEER
61296
60157
60173
CD RECORDER
POLK AUDIO 60157
CLASSIC
DENON
FISHER
GPX
HARMAN/KARDON
71202
JVC
KENWOOD
LG
71297
70626, 70766
71325
PRIMARE
PROCEED
PROTON
QED
QUAD
QUASAR
61852
60420
60157
60157
60157
60029
AKAI
80224, 80346,
81255
81390
60157, 60173,
61202
60032
60157, 60180
60101
60003
71296
ALCO
AMC
81077
HITACHI
INKEL
INTEGRA
JERROLD
JVC
AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGIES
81584
ANAM
71294
70626
71208
70626
RADIOSHACK 60000, 60032,
60179, 60180,
81074, 81609
APEX DIGITAL
60032, 60072,
61294
60420, 60437,
60468, 61075
MARANTZ
NAD
81257, 81430,
81774
71208
KENWOOD
60000, 60028,
60029, 60037,
60190, 60626,
60681, 60826,
61683
61318, 61711
61317
60157
60018
61208
60157
60328, 60489
60179, 60305
RCA
60032, 60053,
60179, 60305,
60420, 60468,
60764, 61062
60000, 60032,
60087, 60145,
60179, 60180,
60305, 60420,
60437, 60468
60157
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
70626
ARCAM
ATLANTIC TECHNOLOGY
81487
AUDIO PRO 80148
AUDIOPHASE 81387
AUDIOTRONIC
81189
AUDIOVOX
B & K
81189
71062, 71087
70053, 70420
70000, 70100,
71364
71208
70420
SONY
REALISTIC
KLH
KOSS
KRELL
KYOCERA
LG
LINN
LUXMAN
LXI
MAGNAVOX 60038, 60157,
60274, 60305
MARANTZ
TDK
TEAC
YAMAHA
70888, 71292
81390, 81627
80701, 80702,
80820, 80840
REVOX
ROKSAN
ROTEL
SAE
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
MD RECORDER
AKAI
DENON
KENWOOD
60435
60157, 60420
60157
BEL CANTO DESIGN
81584
BK
71688
70873
70681, 70826,
71683
70868, 71685
71063
80702
60524
BOSE
80639, 81229,
81253, 81933
81602
60000, 60157,
60305, 61760
60000, 60087,
60179
60029, 60038,
60157, 60180,
60373, 60435,
60626
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC 71682
PIONEER
SANSUI
SHARP
SHERWOOD 71067
SONY
BRIX
CAIRN
SANYO
80189
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
81477
CAPETRONIC 80531
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
60305
71063
71760
70861, 71684
MARK LEVINSON
61484
MATSUI
60179, 60305
60034, 60037,
60180, 60861,
61684
CARVER
80008, 80121,
80189, 80360,
81189, 81289
80195
60157
MCINTOSH
60256, 60290,
60660, 61703
60029, 60043
60000, 60032,
60179, 60420,
60437, 60468
60083
70490, 71790
70490, 70888,
72909
SHERWOOD 60180, 61067,
61950
SHURE
SONIC FRONTIERS
60157
SONY
YAMAHA
CASIO
MCS
MEMOREX
CLARINETTE 80195
CLASSE 81920
CLATRONIC 80797
COBY
CURTIS
60043
TAPE DECK
AIWA
81263
80797, 81263
MGA
60000, 60100,
70197
MICROMEGA 60157
60185, 60490,
61364, 61790
SOUNDESIGN 60145
DENON
70076, 70371,
70412
70308, 70309
70244, 70273
70070, 70205,
70365
70365
70135, 70282
70027
CURTIS MATHES
80014, 80080
MIRO
MISSION
60000
60157
GARRARD
JVC
KENWOOD
DELL
81383
MITSUBISHI 60083, 60098,
60808
MODULAIRE 60000, 60032,
60087, 60145,
STS
SUGDEN
SYLVANIA
60018
60157
60157
DELPHI
DENON
81414, 81846
80121, 80386,
81142, 81306,
81311, 81360
SYMPHONIC 60180, 60305
TAG MCLAREN
60157
NIKKO
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
60179, 60180,
60420, 60437,
ELECTROHOME
82026
60468
60420, 60625
TANDY
TASCAM
60032
60420
PANASONIC 70229
PIONEER 70027, 70099
EMERSON
80195, 80424,
80531
MTC
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FISHER
80008, 80219,
80360, 80797,
81409, 81801
81487
80281, 80424,
80463
OPTIMUS
80014, 80074,
80080, 80121,
80158, 80163,
80177, 80186,
80195, 80219,
80531, 80670,
80797, 80849,
81023, 81074
81366, 81497
80391, 81487
SONIC BLUE 81383, 81869
SONY
80158, 80168,
81058, 81131,
81258, 81367,
81371, 81382,
81406, 81441,
81458, 81503,
81529, 81558,
81622, 81658,
81758, 81759,
81858
FOSGATE
GARRARD
GATEWAY
GLORY HORSE
81567
81263
80281
ORITRON
OUTLAW
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS 80797
GPX
GRUNDIG
PANASONIC 80039, 80309,
80367, 81275,
81288, 81308,
81316, 81350,
81363, 81509,
81518, 81548,
81633, 81675,
81763, 81764,
82967
81299
80189, 80281,
81387
SOUNDESIGN 80670
STEREOPHONICS
81023
HARMAN/KARDON
80110, 80189,
SUNFIRE
SYLVANIA
TEAC
81313
80797
80891, 81289,
81304, 81306
80386, 81273,
81801
81030, 81077
80135, 80842,
81298, 81320,
81805
80110, 81306
80074, 80262,
80464, 81058,
81263, 81282,
81374, 81495,
81643, 81665,
81811
80163, 80463,
81074, 81267,
81390, 81528
80039, 80208,
80309, 81308,
81384, 81518,
81633, 81675
HITACHI
PENNEY
PHILIPS
80039, 80195
80189, 80391,
80891, 81189,
81266, 81268,
81269, 81283,
81365, 81368
80014, 80080,
80150, 80281,
80346, 80531,
80630, 81023,
81123, 81284,
81343, 81384,
81678, 81823,
81935, 81986
TECHNICS
INSIGNIA
INTEGRA
TECHWOOD 80281
JBL
JVC
THORENS
TOSHIBA
81189
PIONEER
80080, 80135,
80842, 81123,
81788
VENTURER 80849, 81390
VICTOR
WARDS
80074
80014, 80080,
80158, 80189
81406, 81414,
81846
KAWASAKI
KENWOOD
81390
80027, 80077,
80186, 80262,
81313, 81363,
81569, 81570,
81770
81390, 81428
80424, 81366,
81497
XM
POLK AUDIO 80189, 81289,
81414
PROCEED
PROSCAN
QUASAR
YAMAHA
80176, 80186,
80376, 81023,
81176, 81276,
81331, 81375,
81476, 81815,
81949, 82176,
82177, 82178,
82179, 82908,
82915, 82918,
82919
81922
81254
80039
KLH
KOSS
RADIOSHACK 81263, 81609
RCA
80080, 80346,
80360, 80530,
80531, 81023,
81074, 81123,
81254, 81390,
81511, 81609
80121, 80158,
80163, 80177,
80186, 80195,
81609
LEXICON
LG
LINN
81076
80281
80189
LIQUID VIDEO
81497
80195
YBA
81921
LLOYD'S
MAGNAVOX 80128, 80189,
80195, 80391,
REALISTIC
YORX
ZENITH
80195
80281, 80346,
80857
80531, 81189,
81266, 81269,
81514
REVOX
RIO
SAMSUNG
80189
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
81383, 81869
81295, 81304,
81500
MARANTZ
80039, 80128,
80189, 80200,
80891, 81189,
81269, 81289,
81671
YAMAHA
82981, 82982,
SANGEAN
SANSUI
82165
(iPod)
82983
80148, 80189,
80346, 81092,
81189, 81764
80219, 80360,
81251, 81801
80163, 80322
80195, 80424
80186, 80262,
81286, 81361,
81386
MCINTOSH
MCS
81289
80039, 80346
SANYO
MICROMEGA 80189, 81189
MITSUBISHI 81393, 81920,
81921, 81922,
81957
MODULAIRE 80195
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
MYRYAD
NAD
81189
80320
SHARPER IMAGE
80797, 81263,
NAKAMICHI 80097, 80347,
81092, 81313,
81385, 81409,
81410, 81411,
81555
NEC
80235
81416
NIKKO
NIKKODO
ONKYO
80322
80322
80135, 80380,
80842, 81298,
81320, 81677,
81805
SHERWOOD 81077, 81423,
81567
SIRIUS
81602, 81627,
81770, 81811,
81987
SONIC
80281
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© 2008
All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
WN24840
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
HTR-6180
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
■ Front panel
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
A
VOLUME
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
SYSTEM OFF
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Remote control
1
B
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
2
3
C
D
POWER
TV
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
AV
TUNER
SIRIUS
CD
A
XM
CBL
DTV
DOCK
V-AUX
MD
4
5
CD-R
PHONO
DVD
DVR
VCR
E
F
AMP
SOURCE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
TV
K
L
M
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
G
PROG
SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER
PROG
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
6
7
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
9
0
ENT
9
0
10
H
I
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
MENU
LEVEL
TITLE
N O
P
Q
R
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
8
9
A-E/CAT.
RETURN
DISPLAY
J
MEMORY
INFO
PRG SELECT
0
A
REC
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Printed in Malaysia
WN67520
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|